Home

Owners Manual - Dealer e

1. CONTENTS g Ba Mirrors ooo ote RET ERR 79 Automatic Dimming Driver s Exterior Mirror Inside Day Night Mirror 79 TEEQUIBDEO ined acy eeeeas ey tery tt e Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 80 m ao E d u 2 88 Outside Mirrors 0 0 00 ee eee eee 81 Operations ccsscescececececeeees 85 nea iiid in MEME 81 Phone Call Features llle 92 Electric Remote Control Mirrors 81 UGORBECE mystemt Feanen gests aa td 2 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 82 Advanced Phone Connectivity 99 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 83 TIUS Hoy would ET A ade UConnect M System a eecru o ack aerate 101 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x jo PME eye eee oscar RR esata en es 108 Third Row Seat Bench If Equipped 120 Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment 108 Third Row 60 40 Folding If Equipped 123 Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners 109 W Driver Memory System If Equipped 125 Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote It Equipped sese hb RR ERIT 110 Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 126 Adjustable Head Restraints All Seating Memory Position Recall
2. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Power Steering Fluid Check 377 Selection Of Lubricating Grease 392 Front Suspension Ball Joints 377 Appearance Care And Protection From Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints 378 i vit i feacdovoicante ot Means aii 998 Body Lubrication csse ggg W Fuse Block a an anaana rrera 398 Windshield Wiper Blades 0 0 00 378 Bases MRD arsar ittis prki 295 Windshield Washers scebluisibar nix 379 Fuses Power Distribution Center 401 Exhaust System eee 380 Fuses Integrated Power Module 404 Cooling System 6 eee 381 Mi Vehicle Storage 0 cece eee eee 406 Emission Related Components 386 Bl Replacement Light Bulbs 407 Brake System eee 387 W Bulb Replacement elecenem e EI 407 Automatic Transmission 389 Heed ie HOMER eU Say beens tes ae Transfer Case sss ee o t s 391 ma dd eee o spi DAS 7 409 EE e DT rr ass 411 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Center High Mounted Stoplight 412 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 415 Fog Lights zi sess esee deg es 413 jr Drm 415 W Fluids And Capacities 00 0 414 Chassis 416 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L V 8 BATTERY ANNE UU ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FUSES POWER atta DIPSTICK FILL RESE
3. 127 Dl OSIUOfIS 2 9 aunt Agta shan wspiniecia inde aya 110 To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory 127 Bre Way Dwele Power Seat M Luppea iat Self Limiting Control 0 0000 cee eee 128 Shir a M p ma Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control 128 Heated Seats f Rquipped erised aaea ji M To Open And Close The Hood 129 Second Row Bucket Seats jn ae ea Oc POC a oP 131 Fold And Tumble esr hee 115 Interior Lights us chee cce ES 132 Second Row 40 20 40 Seat Battery SaVer sss s e were y eed 132 Fold And Tumble less 117 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 Headlight Delay i egre re ee 133 Adjustment ager xx eer are rane rgo 141 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 133 W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 142 Headlights Parking Lights Panel Lights 134 TO ACHVate 20 2 s xu cer Mg Da cnr iata cs Illuminated Entry 004 134 To Set At A Desired Speed Daytime Running Lights Canada Only 134 To Deactivate a cvs em eb cea eee Lights On Reminder s 135 To Resume Speed saatmas esas RR er oes 144 Fog Lights If Equipped 135 To Vary The Speed Setting 144 Multifunction Control Lever 135 To Accelerate For Passing
4. 65 Theft System Arming 00000005 18 Theft System Disarming llle 18 Tilt Steering Column 000000 140 Tire and Loading Information Placard 293 306 Tire Identification Number TIN 292 Tire Markings d sue ase ee RR deri wae 288 Tire Safety Information 00 288 Bb MM Rm 73 297 Aging Life of Tires 2 ssceeile er res 304 AW Pressin so sporren da Reset grs 297 Alignment i242 99d o inead a ams 305 en INDEX 465 CAN BING ss ak pis e as ae pal s dora eins 348 Compact Spare ies o oh e rer aos 301 General Information 000005 297 High Speed 6 citys as Eder be dees 299 Inflation Pressures 0 ee ee ee 298 Jacking xia ets Ree EREIES d ed HESS San 349 Lie ofTumes 22 RT RERO 304 Load Capacity lessen 293 294 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 307 Pressure Warning Light 195 Radial 4222s RES Raa REE TL 300 Replacement 0 0 0 e eee eee 304 Rotation 2204222420004 oo Re hoe XE ae ES 306 Salely epa seraa aka o thi lata ae codes s 288 297 SIZES 424 RPl eg as P3 R4 RR REZCa y cus 290 SNOW TIt6S is ae eras RR ak whe Rn e Rica 306 Spare Tire seess epcsedeiea eket sistens 348 SOPMMING ssa da Fee Tap aak Soe ke a EE RE 302 Tread Wear Indicators nannaa anaa aaa 303 Wheel Mounting ssis er e abs 349 Wheel Nut Torque 4 2 RIRs 352 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight
5. 83 Underhood Fuses 1 2 2 0 0000000 e eee 401 Universal Transmitter lessen 160 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 004 386 Vanity Mirrors 1 eee 82 Variance Compass 1 anaana 159 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Information Center luus 152 Vehicle Loading 6 asus er n 294 321 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage kaa eanna AE 406 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 05 226 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 187 Warning Roll Over c3 ck rer x mx 4 Warnings and Cautions Warranty Information ese ss ceee tiesias res 445 en INDEX 467 Washer Adding Fluid 362 363 Washers Windshield 139 Washing Vehicle ose e ERUIT Res 393 Weight Load Carrying 0 06 321 Wheel Alignment and Balance 305 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0 0004 395 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 395 Wheel Changing esaerea enau ia E bA 348 Wheel Mounting ssl 349 Wheel Nut Torque siie s nu aut i ii i r n 352 Wind Buffeting 0 0 cece esses 168 Window Fogging llle 246 MUndOWS xxt zo EC UMP ERE EE URP CERE PA 31 Windshield Defroster sun 235241 Windshield Washers 138 139 379 Pld ieu Saal ah pa Sat ed 138 362 363 379 Windshield Wiper Blades 378
6. Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or ee ee Fat ei vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector STARTING AND OPERATING 335 NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations
7. Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Tire Size This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure Cold This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load
8. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Se the problem is detected twice in a row the system will WARNING turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off e Never add fuel when the engine is running CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let FEEXIBEE PUEL impurities into the fuel system E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by the unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles e Never have any smo
9. NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The NV 144 transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the following informa tion 4WD Normal Four Wheel Drive High Range Employs inter axle differential Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds All road surfaces 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock AWD LOCK Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Shifting Procedure NV 144 Transfer Case 81975097 4WD to 4WD LOCK or 4WD LOCK to 4WD With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUN NING rotate the transfer case switch located on the instrument
10. 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seatbelt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this program ming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob 6 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All fobs that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard 8 Using the fob to be programmed press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simultaneously 9 A single chime will be heard 10 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the UNLOCK button on the fob 11 A single chime will be heard 12 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional fobs 13 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 14 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed fobs function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the key fob is equipped with
11. Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA
12. Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade RND SET Button Radio Mode To SET The Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations 204 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONT
13. The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected Air Conditioner Maintenance should be done by an experienced repairman For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not o
14. 81954dad 186 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Instrument Cluster fios GRIEE WW 4LOW CRUISE 4WD E C LLLA dIB lI 16 8196a8ab INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Fuel Gage The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Temperature Gage E The temperature gage indicates engine coolant CX temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operat ing satisfactorily The gage needle in V6 and V8 engines will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy traffic or when towing a trailer If the needle rises to the H mark stop the vehicle shift into N Neutral increase engine speed for 2 3 minutes If the temperature reading does not return to normal seek authorized service immedi ately INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 187 CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator if the engine overheats The gage pointer will remain near its last reading when the engine is turned off It will return to a true reading when the engine is restarted 3 Turn Signal Indicators When a turn signal is activated a right pointing or left pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the direction of the turn Th
15. TUNE Control CD MODE for CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Buttons 1 6 CD MODE for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Bject ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 217 Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play
16. Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the driver front passenger and second row seats The controls for the front heated seats are located on the instrument panel below the climate con trols 81228806 Front Heated Seat Switches The front heated seat system allows the driver and front passenger to select from two different levels of supple mental electrical seat heating or no seat heating to suit their individual comfort requirements es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 With the ignition switch in the RUN position depressing the heated seat switch rocker to its momentary high or low position provides power to the heated seat element and maintains the requested temperature setting If the heated seat switch is depressed to a different position low or high than the currently selected state the re quested temperature setting will change to a new selec tion If the heated seat switch is depressed a second time to the same position as the currently selected state the seat heater will turn off The controls for the second row heated seats are located on the center console between the second row seats Rear Heated Seats Switches Each heated seat switch has two settings HI and LOW Press the switch once to obtain high heat level then press the switch again to obtain low heat level Pressing the switch a third time will turn the heated seats off If you do not purposefully turn the switch off
17. If Equipped The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located on the right side of the driver seat and on the left side of the passenger s seat Moving the lumbar control lever fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support Lumbar Support Adjustment Lever Adjustable Head Restraints All Seating Positions Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical at least to the level of the ears UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 To lower the head restraint depress the release button 8 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped located at the base of the head restraint and push down The driver power seat switches are located on the left on the head restraint side of the driver seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjust ment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjust ment Head Restraint Adjustment Power Seat Switch Location 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped The front passenger s power seat switches are located on the right side of the passenger seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls forward rearward adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment NOTE The 4 way seat does not have an up down adjustment
18. US or METRIC appears COMPASS VARIANCE gt 1 Press the RESET button to change the compass variance setting Set this to your current location If you change location 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M change your variance according to your variance on the variance map Refer to Compass Variance in this section for additional information COMPASS CALIBRATE gt YES Press the RESET button to manually calibrate the compass Refer to Manual Compass Calibration in this section for addi tional information Compass Temperature Button Pressing the Compass Temperature button A will return the display to the normal compass temperature display NOTE Temperature accuracy can be effected from heat soak For best accuracy the vehicle should be driven at a speed greater than 20 mph 32 km h for several min utes Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which reduces the need to calibrate the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC
19. 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico city and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you c
20. 145 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 138 W Rear Park Assist System If Equipped 146 Windshield Wipers 0000 138 W Overhead Console 00040 150 Windshield Washers 0005 139 Courtesy Reading Lights 151 H Tilt Steering Column uses 140 MH Overhead Console With Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped 151 Bl Driver Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 141 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Dome Reading Lights Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Compass Temperature Button ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming HomeLink Canadian Programming Gate Programming Using HomeLink Erasing HomeLink Buttons Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button Security ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 158 160 162 164 165 165 165 166 167 Express Open Feature Wind Buffeting Sunroof Maintenance Bl Electrical Power Outlets 115V Inverter Outlet If Equipped Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off Battery Fed Configuration Bl Floor Console Front Floor Console Features Rear Floor Console Features If Equipped H Factory Installed Roof Luggage Rack ll Cargo Management System If Equipped ee UNDERSTANDING TH
21. 8 en SCHEDULE B 431 Miles 123 000 126 000 129 000 132 000 135 000 138 000 Kilometers 205 000 210 000 215 000 220 000 225 000 230 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter at in terval shown or 3 months whichever comes X X X X X X first Rotate tires X X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor rect stowage M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if X necessary Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if X required M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 432 SCHEDULE B ME Miles 141 000 144 000 147 000 150 000 Kilometers 235 000 240 000 245 000 250 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown or 3 months whichever comes first X X X Rotate tires X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage X X Drain and refill transfer case fluid 4X4 X Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace spark plugs Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required en SCHEDULE B 433 M 1 Miles 141 000 144 000 147
22. Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate tires X X X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage X X X X Check transfer case fluid 4X4 X Flush and replace engine coolant if not replaced at 60 X months Flush and replace engine coolant if not replaced at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace as necessary Replace spark plugs Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required gt x lt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 gt lt gt lt gt lt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 438 SCHEDULE A NENNEN Miles 126 000 132 000 138 000 144 000 150 000 Kilometers 210 000 220 000 230 000 240 000 250 000 Months 126 132 138 144 150 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X nei tire for proper pressure and correct X X X X X Drain and refill transfer case fluid 4X4 X Flush and replace engine coolant if not replaced at X 120 000 miles 200 000 km Inspect brake linings X X Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re X quired Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces sary Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV Valve replace
23. There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or 192 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS before and after the service so that the correct mileage can ei The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedom should go out with the engine running The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed ESP Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading be determined 18 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light eter area illuminates with the key in the igni tion switch turned to the ON RUN position It ESP TCS Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light becomes illuminated when the available caused by lack of engine management or brake thermal model 19 Transmission Temperature Indicator This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEU TRAL until the light goes off 20 Electronic Throttle Control ETC This light informs you of a problem with the
24. This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 8105b20d UConnect Switches The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UCon nect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from
25. To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice recognition button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately with in 30 feet the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnec
26. To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision your belt into the buckle nearest you is Noon i dinis i A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly e A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury And a belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision e A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Removing Slack From Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position eA lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt
27. cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME loading may be required for high speed veh
28. llle 415 Exhaust Gas Caution lun 38 72 315 Eails to StakU a 2 pude a under PERPE UY 256 Flooded Starting cs emen Wa 256 Fuel Requirements cce bx pe ren 414 Jump Starting gt ec ss 6 eh bean RS e 354 Oil 64 4434 944408086584 REED 368 414 415 Oil Fillet Cap saisie senseless 362 363 370 Oil SelechOw rei earren era Dabei 414 Qil SYME cvm e E ERI EE es 371 SATUN iire a s RA A4 RUE aad deer E 255 Temperature Gauge iro cies diii eia ieai 187 Entry System Illuminated 19 Equipment Identification Plate 343 Event Data Recorder less 60 Exhaust Gas Caution 38 72 315 380 Exha stSystem sos ke Re eden 72 380 Extender Seat Belt 0 00000000000 e eee 50 Exterior Lighting 00 0000 134 Fabre Care esa ep dis te dede Blaha dard ed 395 Filters Air Cleaner lees 373 Engine Fuel vacas teed Pine ete nee es 373 Engine Oll i es dotes ue rx deg 371 415 Engine Oil Disposal llle 371 en INDEX 455 Flashers Hazard Warning 493 RE Res 346 Torn Signals sen toate cates 135 187 409 Flat Tire Stowage 000004 348 354 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range sheana e nan E E E 320 Engine Oil i rem 320 Fuel Requirements 0 318 319 Maintenance 20 0 0 cee ee ee 321 Replacement Parts 000 320 Star ng 6 og eve P e a bx a eed 320 Flooded Engine Starting 0 256 Floor
29. such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora e Airbag disable lamp status if equipped tion to any third party except when e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data cycles and vehicle mileage with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved e Seatbelt status e Airbag deployment level if applicable 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a e Brake status service and parking brakes Demlenir npor product e Accelerator status including vehicle speed Po Requestediby police uder a tegal marnani e Engine control status including engine speed 4 Otherwise required by law ic Crise canes tains e Traction stability control status 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be p
30. 000 150 000 N Kilometers 235 000 240000 245000 250 000 n Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change N main sump filter and spin on cooler return filter if X A equipped This applies only if your vehicle is used for N police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing E Flush and replace engine coolant if not replaced at X 120 000 miles 200 000 km Inspection and service should also be performed anytime This maintenance is recommended by the manufac ly a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re turer to the owner but not required to maintain the ceipts emissions warranty T L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 434 SCHEDULE A MSE Schedule A Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 Kilometers 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct X X X X X stowage Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace as neces sary Replace spark plugs en SCHEDULE A 435 required Miles 36 000 42 000 48 000 54 000 60 000 66 000 Kilometers 60 000 70000 80 000 90 000 100 000 110 000 Mo
31. 2 To show the GPS clock select Displayed Clock GPS Clock and press ENTER 3 To adjust the time zone Select Time Zone and press ENTER Select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER 4 To turn daylight savings on or off select Daylight Savings and press ENTER Select On or Off and press ENTER 5 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved 224 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M User Defined Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the system clock you can manually adjust the time by choosing the User Defined Clock option 1 At the Clock Setup screen highlight Displayed Clock User Defined Clock 2 To increase the clock by hours make sure HR is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another hour You will see on the User Defined Time display the number of hours you have increased the clock by 3 To decrease the clock by one hour use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour 4 To increase the clock by minutes make sure MIN is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another minute 5 To decrease the clock by minutes use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decr
32. Console sieer perese xe mie ewes 172 175 Fluids Brake 232 2s late dada ERES 387 416 Fluid Capacities lt s ce csse p tresca ob be eon oie 414 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 389 lici MT 387 Engine Oll pce bag RR RR RR 368 Power Steering pian aoe reos Rope raa kss 377 Transfer Case llle ees 391 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 415 Fog Lights 135 sceptro RR Re ee 135413 Folding Rear Seat 00 0000 117 120 Four Wheel Drive 2 0 ari 263 Operation aaeradocer9ee E eee ESS oo ates 263 Four Way Hazard Flasher 346 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 04 288 Front Axle Differential 00 392 Euel 22 is page one eels wae ee dale ee deh 4 311 Filler Cap Gas Cap 00000000 316 Pillet sat epee a deacons mew ve Ee ERR EE ERAS Gauge ancse tete dame dni Fer dera d a Octane Rating esa e ee ass Requirements szegoesee sack rede es Tank Capacity ces isga bd E E Geo eek Eee Fuel Flexible Fuel System Caution 456 INDEX MM USES qp M MTM 172 398 401 404 Garage Door Opener Homelink9 160 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 316 317 364 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 0 187 Gasoline Fuel sss eedem RR Re 311 Gasoline Reformulated lle 312 Gauges Coolant Temperature 000 187 Puel ss 4 eod eheu wes oa nea 187 Odometer we 9 RR RRPEES 191 S
33. EJ FRONT r 80316864 Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed STARTING AND OPERATING 307 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure the placard is lo cated on the drivers side B pillar The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low tem pera
34. Maintenance Schedules section of this manual M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 422 SCHEDULE B NENNEN Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces sary Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 Kilometers 5 000 10 000 15 000 20000 25 000 Se mq el ee Rotate tires X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct X X stowage Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X en SCHEDULE B 423 Miles 18 000 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 Kilometers 30 000 35 000 40 000 45 000 50 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct X X X stowage Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X sary Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 424 SCHEDULE B Se Inspect brake linings X Miles 33 000 36 000 39 000 42 000 45 000 Kilometers 55 000 60 000 65 000 70 000 75 000 Change engine oil an
35. Start position until the vehicle starts but can release the key still in the ignition and the vehicle will continue through the start cycle e Turn the ignition key to the START position until the start motor engages Release the key still in the ignition and the starter will continue through the start cycle until the vehicle starts or for 5 seconds whichever comes first If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be danger
36. TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under inflated Ac cordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset 196 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equ
37. The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Temperature Control The temperature of the air is controlled by a slide located on the top center of the control panel Move the slide left or right to change the temperature The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures 81228299 ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 237 Rear Temperature Control If Equipped Rotating this knob left to the REAR CONTROL position REAR ay allows the passengers in the A second and third row seats to control the blower speed and temperature by means of the rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as described under Rear Zone Control Rotating this knob to the OFF position turns off the rear climate controls Rotating this knob to the right of the OFF position OFFe REAR CONTROL 80a01401 allows the Driver and front passenger to control the rear blower speed and the rear temperature using the front temperature slide The mode front or rear is always controlled by the front mode control For example Panel mode on the front control will give you air from the outlets in the headliner in the rear Floor mode in the front will give you floor in the rear mH Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window
38. The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac turer s instructions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
39. VEHICLE LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors NOTE When the engine is running from a Remote Start if equipped the vehicle must first be unlocked by pressing the remote transmitter UNLOCK button prior to activating the Power Liftgate otherwise the engine will stop automatically 8165df1a Five Button Transmitter Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed To open the liftgate depress the liftgate release switch located in the exterior handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h NOTE e If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate pressing the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area The liftgate will re lock automatically within 10 seconds once the lift gate is closed Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter Press the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is fully open pressing the button twice within five
40. Washer Wiper See the Rear Window Features section of this book 238 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The control can be turned on by pressing the POWER knob When the control is turned on it will be in the last mode prior to being turned off Pressing the POWER knob again will turn off the control The control can also be turned on by pressing any button and it will display the corresponding operation mode for that button 20 MANUAL RR ET vase book CS DELAY REAR TEMP CONTROL IN REAR AUTO REAR OFF 819653f4 Automatic Control The ATC system can maintain a steady comfort level in various weather conditions with a simple operation e Select your desired temperature setting by pressing the or side of the TEMP rocker switches A digital temperature setting for driver and passenger will be displayed The ATC system uses an infrared wensor ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 239 located in the overhead console to measure the tem perature of the driver and passengers Based on the sensor input the system will automatically ocntrol comfort by varying the temperature fan speed and mode This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions It is important that objects are not blocking the infrared sensor It is also impor tant that objects are not used that may scratch or damage it in any way Level Of Automatic Control 72 F 22 C is the rec
41. Windshield Wipers 0 0000 c eee eee 138 Wiper Blade Replacement 378 Wiper Rear ase secado a exa opis 249 Wipers Intermittent 0 0 00000 138 Wrecker TOWING xiu ede don a eine Phas 357 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 395 NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES
42. Wiper 25 Relay Ft Fog Lamps Rly Yellow 26 Relay Adjustable Pedal Rly 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cartridge Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description Relay 27 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw Green IOD 1 28 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw Green IOD 2 29 Spare 30 Spare VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we recommend that you take the following steps to mini mize the drain on your vehicle s battery e Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw fuse L O D fuse located in the Power Distribution Center PDC The LO D cavity includes a snap in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block e The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain e As an alternative to the above steps you may discon nect the negative cable from the battery ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Dome Light 00 WL212 2 Liftgate Lamps ceres riri eedem verbe 567 Overhead Console Lights PLW214 2A Reading Light sos etna WL212 2 Visor Vanity Lights Not Serviceable LIGHT BULBS Outside Bulb No Headlight sssi aces pete et dha e te H13 Front Park Turn 0000 3457AK Back Up sse set tiori nh EUER ehe ard 3057 Center High Mounted Stoplight 921 Front Side Ma
43. a screw remove the screw With the transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 7 Transmitter Battery Replacement 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 81182c72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 3 To assemble the transmitter case snap the two halves together 4 Replace screw if equipped NOTE If the key fob is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting system which will allow the vehicle to be started up to 300 feet away from the vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is part of your ignition key In order to remote start your vehicle the hood liftgate and all the doors must be closed 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To remote start your vehicle press the REMOTE START button on the key fob twice within three seconds To indicate that the vehicle is about to start the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly 8165df1a Remote Start Transmitter Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press the REMOTE START button o
44. another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 81663812 ESP Off Switch Location The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions This can help reduce braking dis tances The BAS complements the antilock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING e BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns follow
45. audible and visual signals The horn will sound repeatedly for 3 minutes and the headlights and security light in the instrument cluster will flash for an additional 15 minutes The engine will not run until the system is disarmed 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the security light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming The security light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed NOTE Ifthe security light stays on continuously during vehicle operation have the system checked by your dealer To Disarm the System Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the doors If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The security system will also disarm if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key If an unpro grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle the engine will start and run for 2 seconds and then shut down After six unsuccessul attempts at starting the engine the system will shut down until the correct key
46. be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you
47. before you place the lever in PARK the key may become trapped temporarily ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward to unlock the door turn the key forward See Section 7 of this manual for door lock lubrication IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK In the LOCK position the steering and ignition systems are locked to provide anti theft protection for your ve hicle It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your vehicle if the steering wheel is locked Move the steering wheel left and right while turning th
48. car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi purpose cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and trim 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based
49. control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 209 Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player Satellite Radio or Vehicle Entertainment System VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequenci
50. crankcase inlet air cleaner The crankcase ventilation system should also be checked periodically Make sure that these units are always clean This will tend to reduce to a minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter the engine Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacture only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacture only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low tempera ture starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location see the Engine Compartment illustration in this section ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes ar
51. digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 293 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRO REAR 3 H1 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS RGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OF 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 A Tire and Loading Information 811b549a This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry aladi 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle Tire Placard Location 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
52. display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press the menu button until Personal Set tings is displayed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 3 Press the STEP button until Calibrate Compass YES is displayed 4 Press and release the RESET button to start the cali bration The message CAL will display on the compass temperature screen in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is 817ba7f0 located Compass Variance Map 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 3 Press the STEP button until Compass Variance is displayed 2 Press the menu button until Personal Set tings is displayed 4 Press and release RESET button until the proper variance zone is selected according
53. doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the RESET button until All DR 1st appears MEM RECALL WITH RKE YES When ON is selected pressing the unlock button on the RKE will recall the memory settings for the seat mirror and radio SOUND HORN W LOCK gt YES When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears FLASH LAMPS w LOCK gt YES When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY gt 0 SEC When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the head lamps remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears NOTE The head lamp switch must be in the A auto mode before this feature will work es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 HEADLAMPS W WIPERS gt YES W
54. drive lock AWD LOCK four wheel drive low 4WD LOW range and neutral N This transfer case is equipped with an inter axle differ ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal all wheel drive position 4WD at all times on any given road surface including dry hard surfaced roads The 4WD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds This eliminates driveline binding and component wear normally associated with driving the vehicle in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads This feature provides the safety security and convenience of operating in all wheel drive at all times regardless of road conditions When additional traction is required the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together through the transfer case inter axle differential and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to these positions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The transfer case Neutral N position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE The transfer case Neutral N position is to be used fo
55. ee hae aed eames da fion 27 Automatic Door 0 0 0 0 cee eee 28 Child Protection ricse 0 0 0 0 cee eee 30 DOOR 6 424 bbe 8 mee REXGE SR aN E E EUR 27 Ignition 25 cee est eese Hee bese aes 13 KEYS gists Hane e Rae Oa ee eS Roe eee ae 12 Power Door scce risso ce ee 28 Steering Wheel eccesso pee ERR bos 13 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 65 Lubricating Oil ee 392 Lubrication Body iier y REERa RR RES 378 Lug NUS ananas E arg E a D dna ge oia ee dete 352 Luggage Carriet el rit daaa e RP as 176 LumbarSupport RR RR RR 110 Maintenance Free Battery llli 375 Maintenance Procedures 000000005 367 Maintenance Schedule Schedule AY 2 122g x RICE T h emat he Pe Des 434 Schedule B Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 194 365 Manual Service llle 446 Manual Transmission Lubricant Selection llle Map Reading Lights Memory Seat iir oa ede kr a epu Een MIFEOIS 2223 hxebesck cease den weve R d RAT UR EG Automatic Dimming sess Electric Powered Heated M emoOLy xc dora Road bitai ara eME Ee Outside 4 4e 944 bao ud eA d Rp SaaS es Reatview sake OO a x RS REOS CAPE S RR E conde Vanity 22e vue rewace8d ea mec y RR ned oes Modifications Alterations Vehicle Monitor Tire Pressure System 460 INDEX MM Mopar Parts sss sx Race o RR e 366 445 Multi Displacement Engine System 287 Multi Function Control Le
56. forces won t allow the belt to retract fully 2 be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos WARNING sible and keep it snug A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt n assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor etc If the front airbags are deployed the front will withdraw any slack in the belt pretensioning retractors must be replaced 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Push in on the anchorage release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than avera
57. had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you
58. ignition cycle for each condition that it detects Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer The system will automatically update and the TPM warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 kph to receive this information A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to sound The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound STARTING AND OPERATING 309 when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes without an audible chime until the fault condition no longer exists If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists NOTE A non matching or compact spare wheel and tire assembly does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor therefore it will not be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS If the non matching or compact spare tire was used in place of one of the four road tires a system fault will occur while driving the vehicle In case of a low pressure condition ie flat tire the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain on solid until the original
59. in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block Pressing the I O D fuse back into the cavity reconnects it Fuses Interior The fuse block contains blade type mini fuses relays and circuit breakers for high current circuits It is located in the left kick panel It is accessible through a snap in cover J E ig ABAE mar BEBE E gm xen B ur s bs 919625ae MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Cavity Mini Fuse Color Description Instrument Cluster F1 15 Amp Blue Battery Feed F2 10 Amp Red Spare Ignition Run Start for Next Generation Con F3 10 Amp Red troller NGC Inte grated Power Module IPM AC Relay and Fuel Pump Relay Door Node and Non F4 10 Amp Red Memory Power Mirror Switch Battery Feed Airbags 2 Fuses in F5 2 10 Amp Red Yellow Holder Ignition Run Start F6 2 Amp Clear Unlock F7 25 Amp Natural Radio Battery Feed 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Battery Feed Blue Tooth Compass Trip Ignition Run Start for Cluster Transfer BS 10 Amp Red Case E Sw Back lighting Satellite Digital Audio Receiver SD
60. instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FUSE BLOCK CAUTION When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it suggests a problem in the circuit that must be corrected NOTE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for longer than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may do this by disconnecting the battery or by disconnecting the two ignition off draw I 0 D fuses located in the Auxiliary Power Distribution Center PDC located in the engine compartment The L O D cavities include a snap
61. intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position STARTING AND OPERATING 283 e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the TCS or ESP system becomes active It will also flash once a swaying trailer is detected and the TSC Trailer Sway Control system activates If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety
62. is at the front of the seat near the floor Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired position Release the bar to lock the seat into position Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners The bucket seats are equipped with recliners The reclin ing mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right side of the passenger s seat and the left side of the driver seat To recline lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback is locked Manual Seat Adjuster 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment
63. is not recommended Many of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control Carbon Monoxide Warnings systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monox ide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an ex tended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door If t
64. make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 4 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface the vehicle unstable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts 6 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the nuts in a crisscross pattern Correct nut tightness is 135 10 ft Ibs 183 14 N m dynamic torque If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353 WARNING WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Always stow the jack tools and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raisi
65. of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h Automatic Door Lock Programming This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and Close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming
66. organizer to the right and lift out of the vehicle Information Provided by DEALER INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS CONTENTS Wi Instruments And Controls 0 B Instrument Cluster B Instrument Cluster Description li Electronic Digital Clock Clock Setting Procedure Bi Setting The Analog Clock Bl Radio General Information Radio Broadcast Signals Two Types Of Signals Electrical Disturbances AM Reception EM Reception see bee ees 199 lll Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability sisse 200 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 200 Operation Instructions CD Mode 204 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 206 182 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio It Equipped 4 cvs reet ker en 207 lil Sales Code RAQ AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone And Vehicle Entertainment Systems VES Capabilities des Re e eso T nr E 208 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 208 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play ies eo ERAGE CER 213 Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play 24 04 tienes cd
67. over his her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist System 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system If Service Park Assist System appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer To turn on off the rear park assist system refer to the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Section 3 of this Owner Manual OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console has the following features 8192e899 e Courtesy Lights e Garage Door Opener If Equipped e Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Courtesy Reading Lights Near the front of the console are two courtesy reading lights Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position fully upward position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter if so equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing the recessed area of the corresponding lens NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they h
68. panel to the desired position NOTE Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive vehicle loading NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry a selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five 5 seconds and retry the shift NOTE The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between 4WD 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the position indicator light will continue to flash At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NV 244 Generation Il Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions The NV 244 Generation II is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch which is located on the instrument panel The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides 4 mode positions Normal four wheel drive 4WD high range four wheel
69. player and Satellite Radio if equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE UConnect section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s A Manual 208 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS SALES CODE RAQ AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS VES CAPABILITIES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate RW FF p gt 1 SEEK MUTE SCAN a LOAD INFO TME 0 K rune vo X 6 DISC MP3 pusurausig PUSH ON SET 1 2 3 4 5 6 RND DIR c j c Ic 3 PTY 81365bb1 RAQ Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume
70. procedure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Within 10 seconds cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position a minimum of four times ending in the ON position do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the LOCK direction 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To re activate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure Auto Unlock On Exit If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened excluding the liftgate This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of Park and all doors closed This feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks Lock or Unlock Auto Unlock On Exit Programming If Equipped Customer Programming sequence to enable or disable the Auto Unlock Feature 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this program ming procedure 3 Insert the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position a minimum of four ti
71. recommended when appropriate for the size of your trailer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 e Trailer Sway Control Mechanical The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehic
72. release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Re move the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Resetting the Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up Pull the window switch up and close the window com pletely then pull and hold the switch for 1 second Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window lock button To enable the window controls press the window control button again Window Lockout Switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
73. reverse the above both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan damage to the vehicle E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 WARNING CAUTION Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for death tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle eR TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom serious injury mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Four Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable tow with the transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and th
74. road tire has been properly repaired and put back onto the vehicle in place of the non matching or compact spare tire 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style NOTE After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if unde
75. safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system secured in a rear seating position Child Restraint Tether Anchor There are tether strap anchorages behind each seating position in the second row and behind the center seating position in the case of the third row seat 60 40 split bench if equipped To install child restraint tether follow these instructions 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor located on the seat back and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions Third Row Seat Tether Anchor 2 Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two headrest posts 1 Place the child restraint in the center seating position of the third row of seats ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers or even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Follow the instructions for Child Restraint Tether Anchor in this section See your dealer for help if necessary Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or inj
76. seconds a second time will close the liftgate When the remote keyless entry transmitter button is press two times and the Lamp Flash feature is enabled the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the switch located on the overhead console 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE e In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel Power Liftgate Switch WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away A beeping signal will sound two seconds before the liftgate starts to open or close NOTE e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 The power liftgate must be in the full open position for any of the buttons to operate If the lif
77. security system on vehicles so equipped General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Programming Additional Transmitters Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your vehicle Additional fobs can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob NOTE When entering program mode using that fob all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle Use the Following procedure to program additional key fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key
78. should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e f your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communica
79. slight pressure to the accelerator The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Allow the engine to idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD 5 oe GS Pn SIZE A MAXIMUM DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT f TRACTION SAFETY K pat STANDARDS bx Y TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H es STARTING AND OPERATING 289 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires
80. speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur e ERM can not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path
81. taana sesa ace X eee Ret E ee 416 Brake System i c ee RS PCR eS 275 387 Anti Lock ABS 0 0 000 ee 275 279 Dise Brakes 4 2224 RR ba bees 387 Fluid Check 2 arenan a ee ns 387 HOSES e e d x RP RXRRIPTG 388 Master Cylinder 2e ed sata beak era Ee 387 Parking iud eeu bd rd iet er da a 273 Warning Light sees 190 193 Brakes j4u4ue a canes browse e 3 R3 G P bade 275 Brake Transmission Interlock 258 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 71 Bulb Replacement 0000050 407 Bulbs Light cese I eee 407 Calibration Compass 0 000000 00 158 Capacities Fluid iesus RR E Titis 414 Caps Filler Utell au hasta ee oe dde IESU S PS Oil Engine ns echoes do Re RR rS RR Power Steer s ume doe rani aedes Radiator Coolant Pressure Car Washes 244437 4i i eni eR x Rm 452 INDEX a Carbon Monoxide Warning 72 161 315 Cargo Management System 45 178 Cateo Organizer i e esee re ace 178 Cargo Organizer recesso rantakana aahua 178 Cargo Vehicle Loading lessen 321 Catalytic Converter casses ee sd 373 CD Compact Disc Player 200 208 Cellular Phone isa RR RR 83 232 Center High Mounted Stop Light 412 Certification Label llle 321 Charging t sooo cde dU une a Glee ae 354 Chart Tire Sizing ee Re ue EAR 290 Child Restraint sees 62 63 Child Restraint Tether An
82. the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names 4 e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 218 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit rate kbps cat
83. the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Global Reset If the RESET button is pressed twice within 2 seconds while in any of the 3 resettable displays AVG MPG ET ELAPSED TIME and TRIP System Status EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e TURN SIGNALS ON with a continuous warning chime e RKE BATTERY LOW with a single chime e PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE Vehicle Not in Park LEFT RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph LEFT RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph DOOR S AJAR with a single chime if vehicle is in motion LOW WASHER FLUID with a single chime SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM with a single chime OIL CHANGE REQUIRED with single chime LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 e COOLANT LOW while in this display to select English Espanol or e ESP SYSTEM DEACTIVATED Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language EIETOTE OPEN AUTO DOOR LOCKS gt YES When ON is selected Personal Settings Customer Programmable all
84. tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehic
85. to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to two transmitters each transmit ter linked to either of the two memory positions 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the SET S button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store new settings 1 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and both side view mirrors to the desired positions NOTE Not all motors may be moved at one time Please refer to the 8 way power seat description 2 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 3 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 4 Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control ATC while the ATC is in Auto mode 5 Press and release the SET S button located on the driver s door 6 Within 5 seconds press and release memory button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be per formed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory po sitions 7 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the transmitters 8 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 9 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory posi tion using the other numbered memory button or to link another Remote Keyles
86. trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people belts are designed to go around the large bones of riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously your body These are the strongest parts of your injured or killed body and can take the forces of a collision the Do not allow people to ride in any area of your best Wearing your belt in the wrong place
87. until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 203 Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers
88. user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3 5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display NOTE The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF LOCK posi tion to the ACC position the radio is turned on and the radio was previously in the AUX mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function MUTE Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 207 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function RND SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Mode Button Auxiliary Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD
89. you can push down on the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im prove vehicle performance it is advisable to lock out overdrive by pressing the TOW HAUL button located at the end of the gear shifter 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The manufacturer suggest disabling the Rear Park Assist System when towing a trailer Refer to Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features in section 3 of this Owner Manual This system is used to help drivers determine if an obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside mirrors When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear bumper Objects can be detected from up to 59 inches 150 cm A warning display above the rear window provides bo
90. 1 4 below the fill hole for 8 1 4 and 9 1 4 axles Front Axle Front Axle fluid level should be 1 4 6 4 mm below the level of the fill hole Selection of Lubricating Grease The National Lubricating Grease Institute NLGI has developed a symbol Certification Mark to aid the vehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for chassis components This symbol an example shown below is located on the grease container and identifies the appli cation and quality of the grease There are two groups identified those for wheel bearings Letter G and those for chassis Letter L lubrication Perfor mance categories within these groups result in dual letter designations for each group The letter des ignations shown in the ex ample are the highest quality level available and when combined as shown can NATIONAL LUBRICATING GREASE INSTITUTE NLGI AUTOMOTIVE WHEEL BEARING amp CHASSIS LUBRICANT ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 be used for chassis lubrication Use only those greases that have the NLGI symbol on the container along with the proper quality level for your application Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the meta
91. 330 Torque Converter Clutch 04 262 Tow Hooks Emergency esee 356 TOWING deze RR ERE VERENSEEETYESI RES 325 Disabled Vehicle llle 357 Guide s five sd P RARE PRA HUN REA 330 Recreational llle 339 Weight cedes meh ence oben sedens 330 Tractoh ose E hk arme SEE s 272 Traction Control s erruem RE RR 192281 Trailer TOWING seses iterii wl quee dw dere 325 Cooling System Tips 000 337 Hitches 2049334 BIS gs EQ unde ur Sod 329 Minimum Requirements lisse 331 Trailer and Tongue Weight 330 lcu T Trailer Towing Guide 466 INDEX aaa Trailer WeIght usur e ings wale rei eU B teg 330 Transaxle xut ned eU P ES GP I dE 258 Automate 2234s eos a wh eS M RR Ed 12 258 Op ration au xen ore auan ERR 258 Transfer Case llle 391 hndunmpP T 416 Transmission miia 258 389 Automatic ugue mc X RA ado 258 389 Filter spicy latina dede ra ve Bede a 390 El id i2 eee dle hele ede ERR edt 390 416 Maintenance llle 389 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 160 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 23 Tread Wear Indicators llle 303 Trip Odometer cc e eR some ee n s 191 Trip Odometer Reset Button 197 Mumm Signals stante am n hao 135 187 409 UConnect Hands Free Phone
92. 60 40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point Bl Windows vox 3 RR YER 31 pale ICEQUI DEOS sesia apaan ekaa ii Power Windows L ia dE LE LLL 31 Seat Belt Pretensioners 005 48 Auto DOWN nei een te hs 32 etis on in dM did udi Deeds EPA i Deu i 032 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 50 Seat Belt Extender 0005 50 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Exhaust System iusso x eder aera es 72 Restraint System SRS Airbags 51 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Event Data Recorder EDR 60 Vehicle such esee e Roo dE Soh o ede Child Restraint 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 02 eee 62 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The ll Engine Break In Recommendations 71 MIS cot ree te edeHnema desi deae 9 hsc PON t 72 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 8165df1a Ignition Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key OFF Ignition Switch Positions NOTE If you try to remove the key
93. ADED WEIGHT 5500 LBS 81200425 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 68 kg 150 Ibs allowa
94. AINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cartridge Cartridge Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description Relay Relay 7 40 Amp Blower Motor Relay 15 50 Amp JB Feed Green Feed Red 8 40 Amp JB Feed Acc Delay 16 10 Amp Spare Green Red 9 Spare 17 Spare 10 30 Amp ASD 18 20 Amp Fuel Pump Pink Yellow 11 40 Amp Power Liftgate If 19 20 Amp Next Generation Con Green Equipped Yellow troller NGC 12 40 Amp JB Feed Heated 20 25 Amp 115v Power Inverter Green Rear Glass EBL T Clear Case Brake 21 20 Amp ABS Batt 13 30 Amp JB Feed RR Yellow Pink 22 20 Amp Next Generation Con 14 40 Amp ESP Pump Yellow troller NGC Batt Green ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Cartridge Cartridge Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description Relay Relay 23 20 Amp Trailer Tow 33 Relay Electronic Automatic Yellow Transaxle EATX 24 15 Amp A C Clutch 34 Relay AC Clutch Blue 35 Relay Fuel Pump Rly 25 15 Amp Stop Lamp Switch 36 Spare Blue 37 Relay Stop Lamp Switch 26 Spare 38 Spare 27 s imd Run Start Relay Feed 39 Relay Blower Motor 28 Spare 40 Relay Auto Shut Down ASD Rly 29 Relay Run Start 30 Relay Run Remote 31 Spare 32 Relay Starter 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fuses Integrated Power Module otherwise the cavity nu
95. AR M IP Ret I id Video Dis DVD Battery Feed F10 10 Amp Red Spare F11 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors F12 20 Amp Yellow Cluster Battery Feed Ignition Run HVAC F13 10 Amp Red Module Heated Rear Glass EBL Relay F14 10 Amp Red ABS ae Ignition un F15 15 Amp Blue Computer CMTC Sentry Key Diagnos tics F16 20 Amp Yellow Reconfigurable Power Ignition Run Rear F17 20 Amp Yellow Park Assist Second Row Heated Seats F18 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Ignition F19 10 Amp Red Spare Fuse Heating amp Air Condi F20 15 Amp Blue tioning w ATC Only Battery Feed F21 25 Amp Natural Amplifier Battery Feed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Fuses Power Distribution Center stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number em of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corre sponds to the following chart These fuses and relays can be obtained from your dealer Cartridge Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description Relay 1 30 Amp Starter Pink 2 30 Amp Front Wiper Pink 3 40 Amp Brake Batt 9 Green Power Distribution Center 4 30 Amp JB Feed Acc 2 Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri Pink bution center located in the left side of the engine 5 40 Amp Power Seats compartment Green This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and 6 30 Amp Run Remote Relay relays A description of each fuse and component may be Pink Feed 402 M
96. BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instru ment panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel The window bags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Air Bag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller e Side Remote Acceleration Sensors e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Airbag e Passenger Airbag e Window Bags above Side Windows e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Interconnecting Wiring e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 How the Airbag System Works Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light in the instrument cluster for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warn
97. Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones es INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 211 Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL ANCE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button or turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or un eed nM Adult Hits Adult Hits Alert Alert Alert Alert Classical Classical Classic Rock Classic Rock College College Country Country Eme
98. CK The NV 144 transfer case is designed to be driven in for 4WD for normal street and highway conditions all road surfaces roads 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Se When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the 4WD LOCK position see Shifting Procedure section for specific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK position is de signed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection If there are no indicator lights on or flashing the transfer case position is Four Wheel Drive 4WD The SVC 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the Service 4WD light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury
99. Dimmer Lever 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wipers Windshield Wiper Switch The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction control lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the LO continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 2 seconds The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km or less WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 NOTE Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or Ice from the windshield NOTE If the front wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restart
100. E FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of truck The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Inside Day Night Mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Day Night Mirror 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head light glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated This option also controls the driver side mirror when it is equipped with auto dimming glass x Automatic Dimming Mirror 817892c4 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Electric Remote Control Mirrors 1 CAUTION The controls for the power mirrors are located on the To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning driver s door trim panel never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obt
101. EF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 44 SEEK 4 RW FF p gt 0 ceg T K m Fa RND SET 815eb156 REF Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 201 Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next li
102. EHICLE 369 Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your style of driving affect the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following to determine if ANY apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and Go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Trailer towing Taxi Police or delivery service com mercial service e Off Road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first 4x4 Models If Used Primarily For Off Road Operation Every 50 hours of use 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Dusty Conditions Driving through dust laden air increases the problems of keeping abrasive materials out of the engine Under these conditions special attention should be given to the engine air cleaner and the
103. ENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M SALES CODE REC AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM 8125e256 REC Radio Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability REC combines a CGlobal Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina tions and routes AM FM stereo radio and six disc CD changer with MP3 capability Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a DVD that is loaded into the unit One map DVD covers all of North America Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions REC Setting the Clock GPS Clock The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 223 the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set 1 At the Main Menu screen highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the TIME button on the unit s faceplate The Clock Setup screen appears Clock Setup Displayed Clock GPS Clock wv 81999ef2
104. F or by turning the ignition ON NOTE This feature can be disabled by your authorized dealer Automatic Headlights If Equipped Automatic Headlights can be activated by rotating the rotary headlight switch to the symbol A The head lights will turn on when the engine is running and the ambient light sensor indicates that the headlights should be activated The headlights will turn off if the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or 90 seconds after the ignition is turned to OFF 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlights Parking Lights Panel Lights When the headlight switch is rotated to the first position to the right the parking lights taillights side marker lights license plate light and instrument panel lights are all turned on The headlights will turn ON when the switch is rotated to the second position Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Illuminated Entry Headlights turn on fo
105. G AND OPERATING Se 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the position indicator light has stopped flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the position indicator light has stopped flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five 5 seconds and retry the shift DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rains
106. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Toggle Pair List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit override pin code Phones phone Select phone ne to be deleted List Phones priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing Phone Deleted System System Lists confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Voice Commands call Primary Alternate s cancel zero confirmation prompts one continue two delete three dial four edit five emergency six English seven erase all eight Espanol nine Fancais star help plus home pound language add location list names all list phones 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M record again redial return to main menu return or main menu select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up mobile towing assistance mute transfer call mute off try again new entry voice training no work pager yes pair a phone SEATS phone pairing pairing phonebook phone book Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment previous The adjusting lever
107. HICLE 149 WARNING CAUTION e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when e The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid using the Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle and it is unable to recognize every obstacle in cluding small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Ob stacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks
108. HOT 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules CAUTION the system should be drained flushed and refilled Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount gine coolants may result in engine damage and may of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT cool system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove ant is introduced into the cooling system m mn all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old emergency it should be replaced with the specified antifreeze solution coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles before repl
109. ING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the push A button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal LOAD Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 10 seconds If no discs are inserted within 10 seconds NO DISCS LOADED will be dis played On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF 216 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M TIME Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner
110. KING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The scissor jack and tire changing tools are stowed under the second row seat The jack is secured in place with a winged stud and a fixed stud It is very important to secure the jack tightly in place by engaging the slot in the base to the fixed stud under the middle seat The winged stud inserts through the eyelet in the end of the jack s worm screw 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES MEM JACKING INSTRUCTIONS 1 Remove the rubber plug from the floor in the cargo Removing The Spare Tire Se The spare tire on your vehicle is located underneath the vehicle in the rear 2 Engage the jack wrench extension to the spare tire winch through the hole in the floor Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck 3 Turn the wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Continue to turn the wre
111. Kilometers 105 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 125 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct X X stowage Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X sary Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re X quired a SCHEDULE B 427 Miles 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 150 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct X X X stowage quired Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X sary Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 428 SCHEDULE B Sx Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 102 000 Kilometers 155 000 160 000 165 000 170 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 months X X X X whichever comes first Rotate tires X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowa
112. LET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE 58 wo l a X z b 3 e y AJ QU D BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE HOS HOME OS ww e 4 e od C 4 a E Uv FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM D e Ns CS r5 v 4WD BRAKE WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE Toa N ER e Ult poU VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON ig d a CO 2 DAN wy oy LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON SRS NX 3 on AIRBAG Pa pun agilis MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER D
113. M Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 193 on for 15 seconds as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 21 BRAKE System Warning Light The red BRAKE warning light will come on when the ignition key is first turned on and stay on briefly as a bulb check If the bulb does not come on during starting have the bulb repaired promptly If the light stays on it may bean indication that the parking brake has not been released or there is a low brake fluid level If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake Booster the ABS pump will run when applying
114. NEL AND CONTROLS 189 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature light is on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until the light turns off If the if the light remains on turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 9 Speedometer Shows the vehicles speed 10 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 190 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS See 11 Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 12 ABS Warning Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System fes which is described elsewhere in this manual Thi
115. NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured be cause the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating Your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the window bags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in modera
116. Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 221 AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES9 un Guide 222 INSTRUM
117. OOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 81916970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO e INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the Auto mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window VIN Location on your vehicle the vehcile registration and title NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN 8 INTRODUCTION ME VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys sees 12 Ignition Key Removal 00 12 Locking Doors With The Key 13 B Ignition And Steering Lock 0 0 13 Ignition Accessory Delay Feature 14 H Sentry Key If Equ
118. QUIPPED Adjustment 1 Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10 inches 254 mm away from the airbag located in the center of the steering wheel 2 Fasten and adjust the seatbelts E 3 Move the adjustable pedal switch located to the left of the steering column near the parking brake release up to move the pedals toward the driver or down to move the pedals away from the driver 4 The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control is SET Adjustable Pedals Switch The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to the steering wheel and pedals 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over accelerator opera tion at speeds greater than refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine The controls are mounted on the steering wheel ON OFF RESUME CRUISE CANCEL DECEL SET 818fa2a1 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 To Activate NOTE Activating any two speed control switch func tions simultaneously i e SET and CANCEL will cause the s
119. RIGHT STOP TURN LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN mbes PINS PARK aie GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector 336 STARTING AND OPERATING RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP o TURN ELECTRIC GROUND pe Is BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL feature should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL feature while operat ing the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals en STARTING AND OPERATING 337 NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Tow Haul If Equipped To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when d
120. ROLS M Operation Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player e This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 205 SCAN Button CD Mo
121. RVOIR DISTRIBUTION CENTER COOLANT POWER PRESSURE STEERING CAP FLUID AIR CLEANER FILTER FUSES INTEGRATED COOLANT WASHER POWER MODULE BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE 819564a2 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L HEMI V 8 AUTOMATIC ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FUSES POWER Hi a de FILL DIPSTICK RESERVOIR DISTRIBUTION CENTER AIR CLEANER COOLANT are FUSES INTEGRATED COOLANT WASHER FILTER PRESSURE CAP STEEN POWER MODULE BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE 818fa074 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and d
122. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE E INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE cece wcrc hh mnn 4 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS cc cece ccc cece cere cere eee rcececeees Fs STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc cece cree ccc c ccc hs hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cee ccc cece cece ccc r n e tn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ccc ec ce ccc tisu reece eee e hh i essences 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2 2 ccc ccc ccc ccc cree cere cree hh i hh nnn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cee ccccc cece cece vceevcecevcecvces 10 INDEX 5 83 3 i ea Ree 600 OE Me Tos ar Eos aL EU arta eas 6 ilo Sine aria ie o 18 0 Kx T9198 8091640 ore ese eae ied Information Provided by DEALER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Minrod chon P 4 Warnings And Cautions 7 Roll Over Warning 0000 4 Bl Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl How To Use This Manual 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions
123. T OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the coolant in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bott
124. UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following
125. Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming HomeLink The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display which includes HomeLink system messages The EVIC display is located in the overhead console NOTE When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside the garage It is also recom mended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and the EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS do not release the buttons until CHANNELS CLEARED is displayed on the EVIC after approximately 20 seconds Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink buttons 8192e7da 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand held trans
126. X 461 Pets sce eU m PEE M PEN 71 Pets Transporting 2 m en 71 Phone Cellular cee eee 83 Phone Hands Free UConnect 83 Placard Tire and Loading Information 293 Positive Crankcase Valve sls 387 Power Brakes og ace ea e ERA E ADR ELE 387 Distribution Center Fuses 362 363 401 Door Locks ue e eR REPRE a Oa 19 28 Lift Gate i24 c Ee E EGTE SETS 35 MITOS uicta wea Beruf iei du ies 81 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 169 170 DLCCTING ME 277 377 Steering Filler Cap sss 362 363 OUDEOOL c5 sadn ote each aon Been quae EIU eee AUN 167 WINdOWS 3 pee eed ee AR a Rd 31 Power Steering Fluid sss ker 416 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts Preparation for Jacking 06 350 Pretensioners Seat Belts 2 0 ee ee 48 Programmable Electronic Features 155 162 165 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 23 162 165 Radial Ply Ties sce Rm 300 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 381 383 Radio Broadcast Signals 4 198 Radio Navigation llle 222 Radio Operation 00 200 208 232 Radio Satellite 5 23 2 cd ee E ES ERR 222 226 Radio Sound Systems 00 200 208 Rear Axle Differential 00 392 Rear Cup Hold r seem 175 Rear Liftgate dy ce oce owe aoe RR E Re 34 Rear Window Defroster 000005 250 Rear Window Feat
127. a indicates warmer temperatures NOTE For best operation make sure that ventilation grilles located in the rear storage area are not obstructed by stowed articles 246 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Front Unit to Rear Unit Chart If the Front Control is Rear Airflow will come selected from Panel Headliner Bi Level Headliner Floor Floor Mix Floor Defrost Floor Operating Tips Fast Cooldown For a fast cooldown set the blower fan to the highest setting set the mode control to the panel fresh position press the snowflake button to turn on the air condition ing and drive with the windows open for the first few minutes Once the hot air has been expelled close the windows and set the mode selector to the Recirculation panel or Recirculation Bi level position When a comfort able condition has been reached choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control and blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort For high humidity condi tions it may be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to maintain comfort Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the Air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature ge
128. a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent filter replacement may be necessary Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional t
129. acement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi tive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50 rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e The warning words DO NO
130. activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To lock the doors and liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once Horn Chirp Programming The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly plants activated If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on the key fob 2 After holding the LOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 5 Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the ve hicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 6 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivat
131. ained on the inside mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage Remote Control Mirrors Switch 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover turns off the light Mirror Directions To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Lighted Vanity Mirror Heated Mirrors If Equipped Heated mirrors are automatically activated when you depress the rear window defroster switch located on the instrument panel The light will illuminate to indicate that the heati
132. al Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and liftgate be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabra sive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic
133. alls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a callis in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone Note this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone
134. also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS This vehicle has three auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use As a safety precaution the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch ON When the optional Cigar Light
135. ampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage WARNING e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean e Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the over a battery when attaching clamps If acid vehicle splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires diately with Tage qpiDun OF water disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep t
136. an press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using
137. and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle Roll Over Warning Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance higher center of gravity and narrower track than many passenger cars It is capable of perform ing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can be caused to go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident roll over of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully A WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up 80bfe0t0 Roll Over Warning Label ee INTRODUCTION 5 Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 million annually In a roll over crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Alwa
138. ar Window Washer Wiper See the Rear Window Features section of this book 244 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Rear Zone Climate Control If Equipped 811aa87d x eux br The rear compartment control uses two rotary knobs one Headliner air comes from the outlets in the headliner for the temperature control and the other for the fan Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to speed control The mode for the rear air conditioning and direct the flow of air Moving the air vane knobs on the heating system is always controlled by the front control outlets to one side will shut off the airflow unit Fan and temperature can be controlled from the front control unit or the rear control unit ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 245 Rear Rotary Blower Control The second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed only when the front control unit is in the REAR CONTROL position or CONTROL IN REAR for ATC The rear blower switch has an Off position and a range of blower speeds Rotating the rear blower control clock wise will increase the blower speed Rear Rotary Temperature Control The second row seat occupants have contorl of the rear temperature only when the front control unit is in the REAR CONTROL position To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature control knob to the right or left The blue area indicates cooler temperatures while the red are
139. are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in en STARTING AND OPERATING 291 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pr
140. as necessary X es SCHEDULE A 439 Inspection and service should also be performed anytime WARNING a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts You can be badly injured working on or around a This Maintenance is recommended by the manufac motor vehicle Do only that service work for which turer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 Information Provided by DEALER IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your lll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 445 Vehicle usi ka see RR E ex 442 E Mopar Parts eese 445 Prepare For The Appointment im Bi Reporting Safety Defects 05 445 Prepare AList sees 442 ee Li sccc iln Il IREILsllizda A45 D RessQnaule Witt Reg aes vatur idera uum Bl Publication Order Forms 0 446 Bl If You Need Assistance lessen 442 442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to
141. ated concerns ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 445 WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www NHTSA gov or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
142. ated in the maintenance schedule all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine performance and emission control The plugs installed in your vehicle should operate satisfactorily in normal service for the mileage indicated in the Maintenance Chart New plugs should be installed at this mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Check the Vehicle Emissions Control Information label for the proper type of spark plug for your vehicle CAUTION When replacing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con ditions the filter element should be inspected periodi cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule B WARNING The air cleaner can provide
143. ated on the left side of the steering column Turn Signals Move the lever up or down to signal a right hand or left hand turn The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn and proper operation 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE of the front and rear turn signal lights If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is defective If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system the arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down NOTE Ifa turn signal has been left on for at least a mile duration a continuous chime will sound 81960905 Turn Signal Lever Turn Signal Auto Mode Tap the multi function control lever once and the turn signal left or right will flash 3 times and automatically turn off es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will momentarily allow the high and low beams to energize at the same time Within one second the headlights will switch to high beams High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or LOW beam 8196c9d1
144. ave been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF they will extinguish after 15 minutes OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The overhead console contains dome reading lights and an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Dome Reading Lights Located in the overhead console are two dome reading lights The dome reading lights illuminate when a door is opened or when the interior lights are turned on by rotating the dimmer control located on the Headlight Switch The reading lights are activated by pressing on the recessed area of the corresponding lens 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The dome reading lights will remain on until Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have Equipped been turned off before leaving the vehicle 81970b55 8192e899 Overhead onsale E Pressing the menu button will change the display to one of the following features es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Trip Functions Pressing the STEP button allows you to scroll through one of the following Trip Function features e TRIP Shows the total distance traveled since the last reset To reset the TRIP function press and hold the RESET button ELAPSED TIME Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last rese
145. battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the Any procedure other than above could result in discharge battery The resulting electrical spark 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirtin could cause the battery to explode sai MEM 2 out the battery vent During cold weather when temperatures are below 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the hooks engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use 7 When removing the jumper cables
146. beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority
147. buckled or the engine is cranked or started programming will be cancelled 3 Unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled A chime will sound immediately once the feature has toggled If during this time the ignition switch is turned out of the ON position or the timer expires programming mode will be cancelled 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Programming mode will be cancelled after the feature has toggled with the seat belt still buckled or if the ignition switch is turned to the lock position or 10 seconds after the feature has toggled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your dealer can provide you
148. button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 229 Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre set stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button if equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call u
149. call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages
150. ce of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447 Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals Information Provided by DEALER INDEX 450 INDEX aaa ABS Anti Lock Brake System 190 275 Adding Fuel sii 0nici Re RR tase rensat 316 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 373 Air Conditioner Maintenance 233 376 Air Conditioning Sissener sre diaaa eh 233 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 246 Air Conditioning Rear Zone 237 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 376 377 Air Conditioning System 233 376 Ait Filter 42 22 temptan u i bara 362 363 373 Air Pressure Tires llle 298 306 Airbag sede e POE ce Ye a 51 196 Airbag Light i22 cc RR REIR 59 73 Alarm Panic 223 0453 cR d RR 22 Alarm Security Alarm 17 190 Alignment and Balance 0005 305 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 000 229 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 382 383 414 Disposal spegi pe te Big e ee p Sedes 384 Anti L
151. ce may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419 e Off road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section
152. chorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attach ments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installa tion instructions Second Row Seat Left Side ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 i teta Second Row Seat Right Side Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restrai
153. chors 65 70 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 45 Child Seat x4 eau ib mue dm ed ards RSE A 67 Circuit Breakers ee ee 398 Cleaning Wheels Climate Control zi sot gar ela Rees 233 Climate Control Rear Zone 237244 Clock roseo eR a 197 198 202 210 222 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 232 Compact Spare Tire cser sdti 0 0 e cee ee 301 Compass Calibration 0 00000 158 Compass Variance 0 00 e eee 159 Console FloO us ves ee Ow Rae 172 175 Console Overhead less 150 151 Contract ServicG 220s kt ke punia ras 444 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 362 363 383 Cooling System 6 ene 381 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 0 383 Coolant Capacity ccsinc ee dane Rope eer x 414 Coolant Level llle 381 384 Disposal of Used Coolant 0 384 Drain Flush and Refill 382 Inspection 4a sae aaa Roped ahh d a 384 Points to Remember 0000 385 Pressure Cap cue Gb as nla kantede rakiet 383 Radiator Cap 222 9 we Rea 383 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 382 414 415 Temperature Gauge sero siisi ras Cinan r 187 Cruise Control Speed Control 142 Cup Holder siis ee RR eR d 173 Customer Assistance eee eee 442 Data Recorder Event lisse 60 Daytime Running Lights 134 Dealer Service llle 367 Defro
154. cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield wiper de icer Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru ments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the
155. could vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat Removing Slack From Belt 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pulling Out Belt and Latchplate 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect on the shoulder belt
156. cupant 1 200 ibs Occupant 2 200 ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 81ta4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Tire Pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and You could lose control of your vehicle satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the ti
157. d engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct X X stowage Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces sary X SCHEDULE B 225 4 Miles 48 000 51 000 54 000 57 000 60 000 7 Kilometers 80 000 85 000 90 000 95 000 100 000 n Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 months X X X X X N whichever comes first A Rotate tires X X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage X X X E Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X S Inspect brake linings X C Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary X B Replace spark plugs X D Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X T Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required X E Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change X S main sump filter This applies only if your vehicle is used 8 for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect transfer case fluid 4X4 Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months or 102 000 miles 170 000 km whichever comes first M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 426 SCHEDULE B NENNEN Miles 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 75 000
158. de Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and 4 move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner RND SET Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play 206 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the
159. defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistan
160. different size specified for your vehicle Some combinations of un approved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You Be could lose control and have an accident resulting in Poor suspension alignment may result in LN may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Alignment And Balance serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided other than what was originally equipped on your wear vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose e Vehicle pull to right or left control and have an accident e Fast tire wear Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer for proper diagnosis Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad equate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tir
161. doors will lock automatically when the vehicle Features reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall selection press and release the RESET button until features when the transmission is in PARK If the trans ON or OFF appears mission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT YES When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is Press and release the menu button until the stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Personal Settings displays on the EVIC Neutral position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st When DRV DR 1st is e LANGUAGE When in this display you may select selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first one of three languages for all display nomenclature press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When including the trip functions Press the RESET button Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the Use the STEP button to display one of the following 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors To make your selection press and release the RESET button until DRV DR 1st appears RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST When All ALL DR 1ST is selected all of the
162. e Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Call Dial by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial or Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert in
163. e clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time keep ing is accurately maintained On the AM FM CD 6 disc radio the time button alter nates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the AM FM CD single disc radio only one of the two time or frequency is displayed Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 198 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately 5 seconds SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button until the setting is correct RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sou
164. e cupping and spotty wear SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION IF EQUIPPED A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen gers 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 lbs 91kg of cargo Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle will be found on the face of the driver s door SNOW TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc tion as the front tires Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire These tires should always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride
165. e distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km or faster than 30 mph it must be towed on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground or with the front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly NOTE Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground at more than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe transmission damage MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Engine Compartment 4 7L V 8 362 ll Engine Compartment 5 7L HEMI V 8 363 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 364 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 364 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs iau dba ec ey ba om s eats 365 Bl Replacement Parts 0 00004 366 W Dealer Service llle 367 Bl Maintenance Procedures n n naaa aaau 367 Engine Qil pes suem eee datasta ha 368 Engine Oil Filter llle 371 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 372 Spatk Plugs 2 0246 304400100 e Re a es Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Fuel Filter 4 serre Dea Catalytic Converter sccis gpa pihtaa iit Maintenance Free Battery 375 Air Conditioner Maintenance 376 360
166. e eb es 215 Notes On Playing MP3Files 217 Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play x iss swusersrpadsa garded 219 Load Eject Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 219 lll Sales Code REC AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Navigation System llle 222 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped ise ninini 222 REC Setting The Clock 222 Audio Clock Display llus 225 ll Video Entertainment System Sales Code XRV It Bquipped kite ote ete ce 226 H Satellite Radio If Equipped 226 System Activation es 226 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 0 00 0000 227 Selecting Satellite Mode In REF RAQ And RAK R di s a e a n 228 ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 183 selecting a Channel sasssa Sa Pistes 228 W Climate Controls 000 233 Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels 229 Manual Control 0 00040 233 Using The PTY Program Type Button Air Conditioning Operation 233 MPEGS EDS G perikis on Front Blower Control s resres kaes eats PTY Button Scan 2 ee 229 font Mods Conil esset cct ech PLY Button Seek eee em 229 Rear Temperature Control If Equ
167. e followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended 7 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized dealer for service At the mileage indic
168. e hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manu facturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight 7 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming step two Do not repeat step one For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the Program ming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink step 3 with the following 3 Con
169. e key until it turns easily The key can be 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se inserted or withdrawn only in the LOCK position Push WARNING in on the key in the ignition lock cylinder to rotate to the LOCK position The key cannot be turned to LOCK until the selector is in the PARK position Do not attempt to pull the shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK position NOTE The steering wheel will lock when the key is removed and the steering wheel is turned around 115 degrees clockwise or 65 degrees counterclockwise from the center position Ignition Accessory Delay Feature For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches Ignition Switch Positions radio hands free system if equipped and power out lets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power out lets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to KEY OFF POWER DELAY OFF under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec
170. e this feature repeat the above steps Flash Lamps with Lock Programming 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob 2 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the LOCK button within 6 seconds 3 Release both buttons at the same time 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Using the Panic Alarm To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once When the Panic mode is activated the interior lights will illuminate the headlamps and parking lights will flash and the horn will sound To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter a second time Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is started or exceeds 15 mph 24 km h During the Panic Mode the door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally Panic mode will not disarm the
171. ease the clock by another minute 6 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CAN CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 225 Audio Clock Display 3 To switch the clock to the small clock quickly press Select this option to change the size of the clock on the TIME again audio screens 1 When you are at an audio screen quickly press the TIME button on the navigation faceplate 2 In this example the large clock appears on the screen 12345 6 819a09ac 4 To toggle back to the large clock simply press TIME 12345 6 819a09a5 226 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets The system is located in the headliner behind the front row seat Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers over 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios S
172. econd row seats are only intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third row seat Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury Fold Tumble and Recline Lever 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The seatback must be fully folded into the down position to allow the lever to be raised enough to release the floor latches Tumble Lever To Fold and Tumble the 2nd row 40 seats from the 3rd row fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the seatback Continue raising the lever to release the floor latches to tumble the seat NOTE The head restraints must be lowered but do not have to be removed to fold and tumble the seats Third Row Seat Bench If Equipped To Fold The Seats Folding the third seat occurs in two stages First the cushion is lifted and moved forward from the pockets at the front of the cushion The cushion will rest onto the floor directly behind the second row seat Second the top of the back is folded forward and rests onto the cushion The back will not fold unless the cushion has been folded forward first ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Seat Cushion Pockets Seat Cushion Movement Up And Forward 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The seat belt buckles are hinged to fold with the seat back WARNING Do not sit in the third row seat unless the cushion and back are properly engaged Proper e
173. ed the wipers will resume operation Windshield Washers To use the washer push in on the washer knob on the end of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is desired If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed for a period greater than 1 second while in the OFF position the wiper will wipe approximately three wipes after the wash knob is released 8193a7f8 Washer Fluid Switch To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT STEERING COLUMN WARNING To tilt the column pull rearward on the lever below the turn signal control and move the wheel up or down as Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is desired Push the lever forward to lock the column firmly moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col in place umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving Tilt Steering Column Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF E
174. ehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Anti Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated elec tronic equipment It may be susceptible to interfer ence caused by improperly installed or high output At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation Continuous steady brake pedal pressure results in optimal braking power while maintaining the ability to steer the vehicle In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal In this manner only can the ABS be most effective On slippery road
175. els 339 Trailer Hitch Classification 329 Recreational Towing 4WD Models 339 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer lll Equipment Identification Plate 343 Weight Ratings lees 330 Trailer And Tongue Weight 330 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts Do not leave children or animals inside parked WARNING Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inad vertently moving the gear selection lever or by vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause exces sive heat in the exhaust system resulting in over heating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or Normal Starting fatal injuries Normal Starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Tip Start Feature Your vehicle has a Tip Start starting system With Tip Start the driver does not need to hold the key in the 256 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the
176. emoval 000 00005 12 Illuminated Entry 0 0 0 0 ee eee 19 Infant Restraint cee ee es 62 63 Inflation Pressure Tires llis 306 Information Center llle 152 Information Center Vehicle 152 Inside Rearview Mirror sees 79 Instrument Cluster 0 0 0 00 ce eens 187 Instrument Panel and Controls 185 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 397 Integrated Power Module Fuses 404 Interior Appearance Care 0005 395 Interior Fuses ze Runs XR PED rs Se ee 398 Interior Lighting 00 00 0000 ee 132 Interior Lights iis icem tee deg e 9e es end 132 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 138 Introduction 2 0 0 0 0 0 000000000 ee 4 Inverter Outlet 115V 0 2 ee ee 170 Jack Location 5 4s s coe 2ee Rr RES 347 Jack Operation 0 0000 347 349 Jacking Instructions 350 Key Replacement 0 0 0 0 000 ee eee 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer lt sics scce lille 15 Keyless Entry System masaia e manie 19 Keys cri asea bade te dk bae deo Red bas 12 Knee Bolstet urere unc bes aw 51 458 INDEX ae Lane Change and Turn Signals 135 187 409 Lap Shoulder Belts illie 39 45 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 65 Lifetof Des vue pm EE RARE HERR 304 Ine pep 34 P P 74 131 ANDA 2 2 prd a ee ea 59 196 Anti Lock War
177. ent cluster indicates the transmission gear selected The selector lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column To drive move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the desired drive position Pull selector lever toward you when shifting into Reverse Second First or Park or when shifting out of Park Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of PARK Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or Neutral position into another gear range es STARTING AND OPERATING 259 P Park Supplements parking brake by locking the transmission Engine can be started in this range Never use Park while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place selector in Park position WARNING Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in P Park Check by trying to move the gearshift lever back and forth without first pulling the lever toward you after you have set it in P Park Make sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always ap
178. ep hills and for engine braking at low speeds 25 mph 40 km h or less when going down hill To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h in this range Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth and fifth if equipped speed Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the transmission selector is in Drive e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal operating tempera ture NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cooldown the transmission will resume
179. eplaced immediately Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 24 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P Park 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M a minimum of two 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on t
180. er heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automati cally when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position There are two additional 12 V 20 total Amps for both outlets power outlets one located in the storage bin of the center console and another located in the right rear cargo area These outlets can be reconfigured by the customer to operate only when the ignition is ON switched battery fed or with the ignition ON or OFF battery fed to allow for cellular telephone charging and or operation while the ignition is off NOTE All accessories connected to these outlets should be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge unless the cus tomer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery feed 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 115V Inverter Outlet If Equipped NOTE Due to build in overload protection the inverter This vehicle may also be equipped with a 115 Volt 150 will shut down if the power rating is exceeded Watts Maximum outlet on the rear of the front center console These outlets can power cell phones electronics and other low power devices This plug is controlled by a switch located in left lower instrument panel To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a 3 Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Cl
181. es pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time MSG or INFO Button Radio Mode Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only 210 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satel lite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the
182. ese modes NOTE If the interior of the windows begin to fog press the recirculate button to return to outside air Some conditions will cause captured interior air to fog win dows when in recirculate mode INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 241 Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow Floor Heat Air flows primarily through the floor outlets lo cated under the instrument panel A small amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Qt e Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlets 242 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Bi Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and those located on the floor NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Defrost QU Outside air is directed to the windshield through the defroster outlet located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C snowflake button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Rear Temperature Control ATC The REAR button cycle
183. ese indicators also indicate proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal check for a defective bulb If either indicator fails to light up when the lever is moved check for a defective fuse or turn signal LED A single chime is activated when the 188 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS left right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM vehicle speed greater than 15 mph 24 km h for more than one mile 4 Low Fuel Warning Light This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1 8 of a tank or less 5 High Beam Indicator Indicates that headlights are on high beam 6 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light comes on for several seconds after the A ignition is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled If this light flashes it indicates a fault in the airbag system Have the system checked by an authorized dealer 7 Fog Light Indicator O This light shows when the fog lights are ON 8 Coolant Temperature Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi A tion For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle shift into N Neutral and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3 minutes If the temperature reading does not return to normal seek authorized service immediately ee INSTRUMENT PA
184. essure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4
185. esting or for prolonged periods during very rough flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use idling or malfunctioning operating conditions a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable Maintenance Free Battery clamps to touch each other The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information
186. ether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than allowed in the United States MMT is pro hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Materials Added To Fuel Fuel System Cautions All gasolines sold in the United States are required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional CAUTION detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in unnecessary cost There Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature is high use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock If spark knock persists lighten the load or engine piston damage may result The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers
187. even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation TSC Trailer Sway Control TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system will reduce engine power and apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once the swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Tow ing in section 5 of this manual for other information on towing a trailer with your vehicle MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS 5 7L Engine Only This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ROCKING THE VEHICLE If vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the gear selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE while applying
188. feature functions similar to a limited slip differ ential and controls the wheel spin across an axle If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning WARNING In the Partial Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable ESP BAS Warning Lamp and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warn ing Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON
189. fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION WARNING Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specifications may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching on fire Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture Do not allow a petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Brake Hoses Inspection should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced or at intervals specified Inspect hy draulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with possible burst failure ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any sign of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses r
190. g EA Rd 341 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 44 Shoulder Bells 52 5 eR IURE Geass Signals TUPA usen crar ce aerias Snow PIOW ced ud Ed e Pe eder d IP SHOW ATES siesena a woke E a de ed DARK us Spare le a ba sealed ae miea e y eds Spark Plugs x idee eder e a dea Speed Control Cruise Control 464 INDEX aa SpeedMeter 4 urhe a RU rtis 189 Staring cago dards ded ep dor y Pe d op 255 Automatic Transmission sss 255 Emergency Jump Starting 354 Engine Block Heater 04 257 Engine Fails to Start 2 6 2 0 0 000040 256 Remote ccs dag n ead LAU niio aaea 25 Starting Procedures 0 0 0 iile 255 Steering Column Controls 0 00200 e eee 135 Column Lock 1 0 0 eee ee ee 13 POWER wei sR aca hans oa re dee we Ee 277 977 Wheel Tilt uz ee Xu ke CEA Re 140 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 230 Storage Vehicle 2 294 o Le RR steeds 406 Stuck Freeing 6 a ie acactia saith Read ang s Ea eee 288 Sun Roof eisai neha bee Rae bbw ea aoe ks 167 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 306 Synthetic Engine Oil 1 2 00 0005 371 System Navigation samia s kss 222 System Remote Starting 00 25 Tachometer espe 9E RE DRE 190 Taillights o es Rt eR Rn 409 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 238 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 187 Tether Anchor Child Restraint
191. g for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be per formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed and needs to be cut NOTE When having the Sentry Key System serviced bring all vehicle keys to the dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid keys by doing the following 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light will begin
192. g system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur es STARTING AND OPERATING 279 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS Anti Lock Brake System BAS Brake Assist System TCS Traction Con trol System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation ESP Elec tronic Stability Program and TSC Trailer Sway Control All six systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are com monly referred to as ESP ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS NOTE ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers WARNING e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following
193. ge X X Flush and replace engine coolant if not replaced at 60 months M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 en SCHEDULE B 429 Inspect brake linings X Miles 105 000 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 175 000 180 000 185 000 190 000 195 000 200 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter or at 3 X X X X X X months whichever comes first Rotate tires X X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor X X X rect stowage Change front and rear axle fluid 4X4 X X required Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if X X necessary Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 430 SCHEDULE B Se Miles 105 000 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 175 000 180 000 185 000 190 000 195 000 200 000 Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid X and change main sump filter and spin on cooler return filter if equipped This applies only if your vehicle is used for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 X months if not replaced at 102 000 miles 170 000 km M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S
194. ge you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in the desired position Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING A 20 seatback that is not fully latched in the upright position will not protect you properly Second Row Center Seat Belt The center seating position in the second row has a seat belt assembly that can be converted from the normal emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode The seat belt should only be used in the automatic locking mode when a child seat is installed at this seating location When sitting in this seating location ensure the seatback is fully engaged with the seatback latch by pushing rearward on the center seatback until you hear a click that signals latch engagement Automatic Locking Mode To convert from the normal emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder belt portion and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor Allow some of the webbing to retract into the retractor as the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound to indicate the seat belt is now in the automatic locking mode Once the automatic locking mode has been activated you will not be able pull the webbing back out of the retractor To disengage
195. have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance CAUTION These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause Engine Oil oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could dam age your engine Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines 80c0715e FULL RANGE MARK ee MAINTAINING YOUR V
196. he dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room temperature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change It is important that proper lubricant is used in the transmission Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Transfer Case CAU TIONI Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac evident the transfer case fluid level may be low Have the turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration transfe
197. he front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity The steer ing wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the window bags to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to chil dre
198. he gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle NOTE To avoid contact between fuel cap and paint hang tether strap over hook provided on inner fuel door CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the malfunction indi cator light to turn on NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling
199. he key 2 Press and release the memory SET S button located on the driver s door 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Within 10 seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter To disable another transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 3 for each transmitter NOTE The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to memory is enabled when delivered from the factory The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to memory can be disabled or later reen abled by a qualified DaimlerChrysler representative Self Limiting Control To improve vehicle reliability the memory system in cludes a self limiting control for full travel positioning of power seat and Adjustable Pedal movement all direc tions This self limiting control may however develop an unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is encountered at sometime during usage One example of such an occurrence may include a box or package ob structing the full rearward movement of the driver s seat Once the obstruction is removed the self limiting control may be restored to maximum position The self limiting control may be restored by first reaching the recently limited or obstructed position then release and reactivate the same button or buttons Continued seat travel beyond the obstructed position will indicate the recently encoun tered self limitation has been clea
200. he relation of each position to all other positions For a good signal the display will place a box around the selected transmission range PRND21 If the PRNDL displays only the char acters PRND21 no boxes have the system checked by an authorized dealer 16 Trip Odometer The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage To toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer press the Odometer Trip Odometer Button To reset the Trip Odometer press and hold the button while in trip mode until the Trip Odometer resets Also the cluster will display replacing the odometer vehicle warning messages such as door ajar gate ajar low wash No fuse and the outside temperature The outside temperature will display in the odometer for non Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Pressing the trip odometer reset but ton toggles the feature back to the odometer NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC all warnings including door ajar liftgate open low washer fluid will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter If Equipped in Section 3 17 Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven
201. he windows and set the Mode control to the setting at either 4 or lt J or press the amp button if equipped Once comfortable choose a mode position and adjust temperature control and blower speed as necessary for comfort WARM O If sunny use AUTO mode if equipped set the Mode control at 44 and press the WEATHER v a on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at 53 No amp is necessary COOL OR a n If sunny use AUTO mode if equipped set the Mode control at then press the COLD HUMID 4 46 button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at is necessary CONDITIONS G7 vt COLD DRY CONDITIONS In cloudy or dark weather use AUTO mode if equipped set the Mode control at If sunny set the Mode control at 44 or lt and for snowy or very cold weather requiring extra heat to the windshield use a In most cases turning on the Air Conditioning press the 4 button will clear the fog Adjust WINDOW FOGGING temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As it gets colder it may E be necessary to direct air onto the windshield If so set the Mode control at 3 or and adjust temperature control and blower speed t
202. heels Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on e Total weight must be distributed between the tow Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact m spare tire e GCWR must not be exceeded Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic Information section of this manual on Tread Wear brake controller is not required Inditators for e proper mspection procedure Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for Ibs 907 kg proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits CAU HONI Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should h it brak d th
203. hen ON is selected the headlamps will automatically turn on when the wiper switch is activated EASY EXIT SEAT YES When ON is selected and the key is removed from the ignition the driver s seat will automatically move rearward to allow easy exit TILT MIRRORS IN R gt YES When On is selected and the transmission is put in reverse the outside mirrors will tilt downward KEY OFF POWER DELAY gt OFF When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min appears ILLUMINATED APRCH OFF When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the RESET button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears PARK ASST SYSTEM YES When YES is selected the Park Assist System is activated when the vehicle is in Reverse When No is selected the Rear Park System is turned off UNIT IN gt US METRIC The EVIC odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until
204. her condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say send Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate is optimized for the voice of the person who stored the name in the phonebook You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows and e dry weather condition e Operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Bluetooth Communication Link Occasionally Cellular phones have been found to lose c
205. ho weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 LATCH child restraint anchorage system See the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System section e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system See the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Ch
206. hoses and clamps or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is manda tory to replace all clamps that have been loosened or removed during service Care should be taken in install ing new clamps to insure they are properly torqued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV Valve Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plug ging because of deposits Deposits can accumulate in the PCV valve and passage with increasing mileage Have the PCV valve hoses and passages checked for proper operation at the intervals specified If the valve is plugged or sticking replace with a new valve Do not attempt to clean the PCV valve Check ventilating hose for indication of damage or plugging with deposits Replace if necessary Brake System Power Disc Brakes Front and Rear Disc brakes do not require adjustment however several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material Brake Master Cylinders The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced or immediately if the brake system warning light is on If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap With disc brakes
207. icle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h Once the warning is triggered it can be paused if the vehicle speed drops below 5 mph 8 km h The warning will be restarted if the vehicle speed becomes greater than 5 mph The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt DO NOT start the engine or press the trip reset button 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the seat belt Warning Light to turn off If during this time the seat belt becomes un
208. icle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle WARNING poorly The instability could cause an accident Al High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn t
209. ilable NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP Control Switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP on by momentarily depress ing the ESP Control Switch This may be done with the vehicle is in motion 4WD LOW Range Partial Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOCK or neutral to 4WD LOW the ESP system will be in this mode In 4WD LOW ESP function is desensitized until the vehicle reaches a speed of 30 mph 48 km h At 30 mph 48 km h the normal ESP stability function returns and the ESP TCS Indicator Light turns off When the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph 40 km h the ESP system goes back to Partial Off ESP is desensitized at low vehicle speeds in 4WD LOW so that it will not interfere 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h The ABS is in a special Off Road mode that allows wheels to lock at lower speeds if gravel is detected to shorten stopping distances NOTE When the vehicle is in 4WD LOW a feature of the ESP system remains active whether the ESP is on or off This
210. ildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Ifthe shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a restraint child to put the shoulder belt under an arm e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manufacturer recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will e Improper installation can lead to failure of an use it before you buy it infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex weight and height Check the label on the restraint for actly when installing an infant or child restraint weight and height limits A rearward facing infant restraint should only be e Carefully follow the instructions that come wi
211. ing System section NOTE For the power liftgate feature if equipped refer to the Power Liftgate section 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Your vehicle s keyfob may have three four or five buttons shown depending on the optional features purchased with your vehicle This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a minimum of 66 feet 20 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To unlock the doors and liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and liftgate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the keyfob NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will
212. ing another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this Section of this manual This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non slipping wheels to provide optimal forward trac tion 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles
213. ing light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING a e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines N if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC will not detect roll over The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column and knee bolsters If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system During a moderate to severe rear impact the ORC may deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone checked right away e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate t
214. ion quency kHz 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 RUPEE 3 05 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG2 Audio 5 995 46 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 56 48 40 32 24 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 219 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode for MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button wi
215. ional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Weight Ratings for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Duty Fifth Wheel Greater than 10 000 Ibs Gooseneck 4540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings NOTE For additional trailer towing information maxi mum trailer weight ratings refer to the following website addresses e http www dodge com towing e http www dodge ca Canada Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side
216. ipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 25 Airbag Indicator The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 a seconds when the ignition is first turned ON If V the light does not come on when the ignition is first turned on or the light stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag system checked by an autho rized dealer 26 4WD Indicator Indicates when transfer case is in 4WD position 27 SVC Service 4WD Indicator The SVC 4WD lights will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and will stay on for 2 seconds If the light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 28 Cruise Light Speed Control This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 197 29 TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear shift lever This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected 30 4LOW Indicator Indicates transfer case is in 4LOW position 31 Odometer Trip Odometer Button Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer display Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK Th
217. ipped 15 Replacement Keys 00000005 16 Customer Key Programming 16 General Information 00 05 17 E Security Alarm System If Equipped 17 To Set The Alarm 22 xke BREVE 18 To Disarm The System 0006 18 B Illuminated Entry i rn 19 Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks 19 Bl Remote Keyless Entry 0 0040 19 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 20 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 21 Using The Panic Alarm 22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information 05 22 Window Lockout Switch llus 33 Programming Additional Transmitters 29 MIR Gate gps k op cove eth ou UE rhe ayes 34 Battery Replacement 004 24 Power Liftgate If Equipped 35 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 WW Occupant Restraints lille 38 MM D008 LOCKS ers cea has nerie Dac ee aa 27 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 39 Manual Door Locks ss 1002s 406s e 27 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 44 Power Door Locks 0 0000 eee 28 Second Row Center Seat Belt 45 Child Protection Door Lock 30 Rear
218. ipped Satellite Antenna ss enr Exc 229 Rear Window Defrosting And Rear Window Reception Quality llle 230 Washer Wiper see 237 lll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 230 Automatic Temperature Control ATC Radio Operation 0 0 0 0c cece eens 231 a a a CD Player eee ees 231 Automatic Control 000 238 Mi Compact Disc Maintenance 232 Level Oi Aaoi LONON v saaran fare 2n li Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 232 Manual Consol TC site equite ges de oe Rear Zone Climate Control If Equipped 244 184 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses Rear Rotary Temperature Control 245 Front Unit To Rear Unit Chart 246 Operating TIPS isses s pee a ew eee 246 Operating Tips Chart 0 248 ll Rear Window Features 0 0 249 Rear Window Wiper Washer 249 Rear Window Defrosting 250 E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 185 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 1 Headlight Switch 6 Glove Box 11 Heated Seat Switches 15 Hood Release 2 Air Outlets 7 Radio 12 Electronic Stability System ESP 16 Adjustable Pedal Control Switch 3 Demister Outlets 8 Climate Controls Off Switch 17 115v Inverter Switch 4 Instrument Cluster 9 Rear Washer Wiper 13 Transfer Case Switch 5 Airbags 10 Power Outlet 14 Speed Control Switches If Equipped
219. irements with the exception of 3 Key ON are not met prior to depressing the Neutral N button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer then the Neutral N indicator light will flash continu ously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral N button is released NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into Park P with the transfer case in Neutral N and the engine RUNNING With the transfer case in Neutral N ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park P Shifting OUT of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut engine OFF 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine 4 Depress brake pedal 5 Shift automatic transmission to Neutral N 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case Neutral N button for 1 second 7 After the Neutral N indicator light turns off release the Neutral N button 8 After the Neutral N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the select
220. is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 324 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle A loaded vehicle is shown in the following example Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR capabilities are exceeded Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten service life NOTE The weights shown in this chart are not the weights for your vehicle Also the amount of load added to both the front and rear axles can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed both in its curb weight condition and in its loaded and ready for operation condition Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 6500 LBS AS AAD FRONT CURB 2153 REARCURB 1458 FRONT LOAD _423 REARLOAD 1466 FRONT WEIGHT 2576 REAR WEIGHT 2924 LOADED LOADED GAWR FRONT 3600 GAWR REAR 3900 TOTAL LO
221. is section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options are at any prompt say Help follow ing the voice on beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the mirror Cancel Command At any prompt after the voice on beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have NOTE e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instruc
222. is used To exit alarming mode press the RKE Unlock button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key The security alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit NOTE You may accidentally activate the security sys tem horn sounds and lights flash by entering the vehicle without using the key fob to unlock the door s The security system can be disarmed with the key fob s UNLOCK button or by inserting a programmed Sentry Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 ILLUMINATED ENTRY Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the doors are unlocked using the key fob The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the last door is closed or until all doors are closed and either the ignition is turned to the ON position or a key fob LOCK button is pressed There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the interior lights off after 8 minutes if the ignition is OFF and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY 8165df1a Five Button Transmitter NOTE For the remote starting feature if equipped refer to the Remote Start
223. joints if equipped and front suspen sion components e Check the automatic transmission fluid level e Check the coolant level hoses and clamps e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation nn SCHEDULE B 421 Schedule B Follow schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the
224. king materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 ETHANOL FUEL E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates be tween E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuels it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in drivability during warm up 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F you may experience hard starting and rough idle follow ing start up even if the above recommendations are fo
225. l in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle wash it as soon as possible 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains and to polish your vehicle Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION S Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces peci
226. le and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING EXAMPLE ONLY An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT 81811965 Weight Distributing Hitch System ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT 8181f96f Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Fifth Wheel Hitch A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed Connects a vehicle and fifth wheel trailer with a coupling king pin Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the opt
227. le the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg 296 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 865 ibs 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Oc
228. le need only be checked once a month ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clea
229. lid and base e 12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment e Tissue holder amp pen holder e Second row heated seat switches e Four slots for DVD s Rear Floor Console To access the storage bin lift up on the console door latch 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS FACTORY INSTALLED ROOF LUGGAGE RACK B122a58d The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 68 kg 150 Ibs and should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area The side rails between the stantions should be used to tie down cargo Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached NOTE Crossbars are offered by Mopar accessories External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 CAUTION To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Travel at reduced speeds and turn corne
230. ll latch plate and keyed buckle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Third Row Center Seat Belt Third Row Center Seat Belt To reattach the seat belt to the third row center seat pull the small keyed buckle latch plate forward from the headliner slots and insert it into the keyed buckle until there is an audible click Refer to the previous section for the proper seat belt usage 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 81663bf3 Headliner Stowage Slots Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the veh
231. ll production and special equip internal parts ment on the truck as shipped from the factory NOTE Always refer to the equipment identification mm plate when ordering parts Information Provided by DEALER WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 5 346 W Jump Starting Procedures 354 H Jacking And Tire Changing 347 W Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped 356 Jack Location 2 0 0 347 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle H Jacking Instructions 000 348 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Removing The Spare Tire 348 Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Tire Changing Procedure 349 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The flasher switch is on the top of the steering column just behind the steering wheel Press the flasher switch and all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 JAC
232. llow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 e Safety chains must always be used between your 2 GTW vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the 3 GAWR frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized slack for turning corners This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade percentage of total trailer weight When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmissionin Towing Requirements Tires P for Park With a manual transmission shift the transmission into reverse And with four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in neutral Always block or chock the trailer w
233. llowed Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles Whether operating the vehicle on an E 85 ethanol fuel or unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the same Refer to the Maintenance Procedures section of this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine oil Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F In the range of 0 F to 32 F you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in drivability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel con sumption You can expect your MPG and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle a STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E 85 fuel follow Sched ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficult
234. longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area e t may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for more than a short period If so adjust your climate control system to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed and the controls in any position except OFF or RECIRC e The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle or damage to the underside or rear of the vehicle Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja cent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace or adjust as required ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Heater Defroster Ducts Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation Check for proper air flow through all defroster ducts If there are any question regarding the operation of your heater defroster ducts have the system checked by an authorized dealer Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts mu
235. mber of each fuse is stamped on um the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart Cartridge Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description Relay 1 Relay Wiper On Off Rly 2 Relay Wiper Hi Lo Rly 3 Relay Horn Rly 4 Relay Rear Wiper Rly 5 Relay Lt Trailer Tow Stop Turn Rly 6 Relay Rt Trailer Tow Stop Integrated Power Module Turn Rly An integrated Power Module is located in the left side of 7 Relay Park Lamps Rly the engine compartment This center contains cartridge 8 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps fuses mini fuses and relays A description of each fuse Red and component may be stamped on the inside cover 9 10 Amp Trailer Tow Park Red Lamps ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Cartridge Cartridge Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description Relay Relay 10 10 Amp Rt Park Lamps 18 20 Amp Front Control Module Red Yellow FCM Batt 1 11 Relay Radiator Fan Hi Rly 19 20Amp Lt Trailer Tow Stop 12 20Amp Front Control Module Yellow Turn Yellow FCM Batt 4 20 20 Amp Front Control Module 13 20 Amp Front Control Module Yellow FCM Batt 3 Yellow FCM Batt 2 21 20 Amp Rt Trailer Tow Stop 14 20 Amp _ Adjustable Pedal Yellow Turn Yellow 22 30 Amp Front Control Module 15 20Amp Ft Fog Lamps Pink FCM BATT 5 Yellow 23 40 Amp Radiator Fan 16 20 Amp Horn Green Yellow 24 Relay Radiator Fan Lo Rly 17 20 Amp Rear
236. mes ending in the ON position do not start the engine 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If necessary repeat the above procedure Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors of your vehicle have the child protection door lock system 81976445 Child Lock To use the system open each rear door and slide the control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage the child protection locks When the system on a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WINDOWS Power Windows WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE After setting the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK p
237. mited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 WARNING CAUTION Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a
238. mitter button Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed The EVIC will display CHANNEL X TRAINING once the transmitter is programmed the EVIC will display CHANNEL X TRAINED X refers to the desired channel being trained 1 2 or 3 NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Pro gramming section 4 Once CHANNEL X TRAINED is displayed on the EVIC release both buttons Programming is now com plete When the HomeLink button is subsequently pressed CHANNEL X TRANSMIT is displayed on the screen and your device should be activated garage door should open NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming step two Do not repeat step one NOTE If the EVIC display shows CHANNEL X TR ASMIT where X is channel 1 2 or 3 but your device does not activate the device may be equipped with a rolling code system Continue with the following steps five through seven to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener manufactured after 1995 The assistance of a second person may make the following programming steps quicker and easier 5 Programming a Rolling Code System At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where th
239. mod els This seat is equipped with a unique fold and tumble feature The 40 seatbacks have spring loaded hinges which assist with the folding of the seatbacks Tumble Lever 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Second row leather seats have seatback recliners at the be folded into the down position for use as a cargo floor 40 seating positions Raising the lever allows the seat or the seat can now be tumbled forward to allow access back to be reclined an additional 11 degrees to the rear of the vehicle To fold the 20 seatback pull the strap forward to release the seatback Fold the seatback down for use as an armrest or to carry cargo When returning the seatback to the upright position push the seatback rearward to latch the seatback Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position WARNING The 20 seatback contains the center shoulder belt A 20 seatback that is not fully latched in the upright position will not protect you properly Fold Tumble and Recline Lever To Fold the 40 seatbacks fully raise the lever on the side of the seat to release the seatback The seatback can now es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 To Tumble the 40 seat fully raise the lever on the side of the seat to release the floor latches and tumble the seat WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the outer 40 second row seats in the tumbled position The outer 40 s
240. n If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Emission Related Components Fuel System Hoses And Vapor Vacuum Harnesses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking checking tears cuts abrasions and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be given to examining hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust mani fold Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage You are urged to use only the manufacturer s specified
241. n The window bag is only about 3 1 2 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the impact sensors detect a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e
242. n 5 7L 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Front Axle SAE 75W 90 Multipurpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 418 Schedule B z 2zeeeka se ces Bl Maintenance Schedules 00 0 418 Schedule A clos Ra antun tyt eso M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type on the following pages must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper func tioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent maintenan
243. n both outboard side of the seat and push the seatback forward seating positions Raising the lever allows the seatback to be reclined an additional 11 degrees The second row bucket seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy access to the third seat or rear cargo area To fold and tumble the seat follow these steps 1 Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the seat 2 Lower the head restraint to its full downward posi tion Folding the Setaback 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Pull up on the release handle and lift to tumble the To relatch the seat tilt the seat rearward and push down seat fully forward If the seat contacts the rear of the front firmly to engage the rear attachments Then lift the seat move the front seat forward seatback release lever and pull the seatback up to return it to its full upright position To fold and tumble the 2nd row seats from the 3rd row fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the seatback Continue lifting the lever to release the floor latches to tumble the seat us Tumbling the Seat Forward es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Second Row 40 20 40 Seat Fold and Tumble The 40 20 40 seat configuration is standard on all
244. nce To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the key fob After the vehicle is unlocked you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle insert the key in the Ignition and move it to the RUN position otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto matically turn off Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of park Pressing the brake pedal ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but cancelled before the engine begins to crank After either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position then back to LOCK DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks All the doors can be manually locked from the inside by pushing down the door lock plunger located at the rear of the door Both front doors may be opened from the inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked position WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event
245. nce for the presence of a driver 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer TSC Trailer Sway Control If Equipped e Trailer Sway Control Electronic TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system will reduce engine power and apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once the swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Even if your vehicle is equipped with electronic trailer sway control mechanical sway control is
246. nch until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349 It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose cable CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch Tire Changing Procedure WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift 6 Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack The scissor jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only It is not recommended that the jack be used for service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK automatic transmission On Four Wheel Drive vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when ope
247. nd system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 199 Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 200 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se SALES CODE R
248. necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Auto matic Locking Mode earlier in this section Second Row Seat Tether Anchors Child Restraints in Third Row Seating If Equipped For vehicles equipped with third row split bench 60 40 seating the tether strap anchorage is located on the seat back behind the center seating position The hooks in the rear floor are NOT designed to withstand the forces that may occur during a crash 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Children and infants are
249. ng excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Washers The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Always fill the reservoir with wind shield washer fluid not radiator antifreeze To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This
250. ng elements are ON Turning Off the rear window defroster or the ignition will deactivate the heated mirrors Automatic Dimming Driver s Exterior Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying light glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside mirror and can be turned off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language
251. ng properly 5 following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver POWER STEERING can prevent accidents The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steerin
252. ng the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be 7 Remove wheel blocks Do not install chrome or alu raised minum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking result in cap damage Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position Stow the Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack replaced tire jack and tools as previously described Only use the jack in the positions indicated If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts stowed spares must be stowed with the value stem facing the ground 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME To Stow The Flat Or Spare JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle Rotate the winch mechanism un
253. ngagement can be verified by pushing pulling on the upright seatback The seatback will not move unless prop erly engaged Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row seatback s folded or tumbled In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured MAT Rear Seat Folded CAUTION When loading cargo into the rear of you vehicle with the 3rd row seat folded flat be careful not to damage the material on the head restraints es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Third Row 60 40 Folding If Equipped OS 2s Third Row Seat 40 Seatback Fold Third Row Seat 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SEATBACK SEATBACK RELEASE Third Row Seat Features Third Row Seat Folded Forward es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Third Row Seat Return Pull Strap DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat position driver s outside mirror position adjustable brake and accelerator pedals position Automatic Tem perature Control ATC temperature and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed Your vehicle was delivered with two Remote Keyless Entry transmitters One or both transmitters can be linked
254. ning 00 000 190 Automatic Headlights 133 Back Upes pede s b Ee oe gh oh doe ede d 409 Brake Warning ss eed Rex gee eee 193 Bulb Replacement s ssanie ri oer Aea a 407 Center Mounted Stop 00 412 Courtesy Reading ills 151 Crus 24g da ioe i r eai aci and VR deb 196 Daytime Running 4 hcec 134 Dome sacs cse ree aene RC ee eds 151 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 193 283 FOS l dddesa hu pesni rentieri 135 188 413 Hazard Warning Flasher 346 Headlights 4 2529 RI EI RR x RD 134 High Beam ces ee ny dha Brande ase al M 137 High Beam Low Beam Select 137 Instrument Cluster 0005 134 187 InteriOf gyei eter eu buts wae ch ae EXE 132 151 License 2 04 fe gene ed oles deena ESSE A 411 Lights On Reminder iawa 135 Low Fuel 000 eee eee eee 187 188 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 194 Park scueiew eR eae wa ad 4 arena Pe 134 PASSING estere ae tacet mar gee Ak A 137 Reading cse vee xcov Phe eis 151 Seat Belt Reminder seneca raneta wams 188 SEVICE ig esos eet ne d RR d EO RUE ee ae Rod 407 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 195 Traction Control 02 eee eee 283 Tum signal os kein edi eaten ke act 135 409 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 187 en INDEX 459 Loading Vehicle oni ses dore ul Ps Ra eer 321 Ties bud pe atte ee ee ane p 293 LOCKS 2 moda
255. ning On or Off perform the following steps Position the mode control button to the desired airflow setting e Set the front blower control to any desired speed e Press the Snowflake A C button which is located to the right of the temperature control slide An indicator light on the Snowflake A C button shows that the air conditioning is On e Press the Snowflake A C button a second time to turn the air conditioning Off NOTE The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for several seconds Slight changes in 234 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M engine speed or power may be noticed when the com pressor cycles This is a normal occurrence since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and improve fuel economy Front Blower Control The Front Blower controls the amount of air delivered to the passenger compartment There are four blower speeds The fan speed increases as you turn the control clock wise When the front blower control is turned to OFF the blower will be turned off and the system will be positioned in recirculation mode FRONT OFFe 80201400 Front Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution 81158660 NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dot
256. normal opera tion 262 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL button This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode 5th gear if equipped is disabled and 2 3 and 3 4 shift patterns are modified Shifts into Overdrive 4th gear are allowed during steady cruise for improved fuel economy and automatic closed throttle downshifts to 3rd gear for improved braking will occur during steady braking The TOW HAUL light will illuminate in the instru ment cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the button must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included in all automatic transmissions A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may result in a slightly differe
257. ns it to the closed position Both opening and closing operations in the vent mode occur only while the switch is held NOTE The sunroof will continue to operate for ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until the driver door is opened This feature may be disabled by your authorized dealer Express Open Feature During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature To close the sunroof hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed forward again To close fully hold the switch in the forward position until the glass movement has stopped The sunshade can be opened manually It will also open as the sunroof opens The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle WARNING In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could
258. ns tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s second row seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now available However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All three second row seating positions have lower an
259. nt You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each second row seating position located on the back of the seat Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attach ment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then attach the tether strap to the anchor age located on the back of the seat being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward int
260. nt feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Over drive and in Drive NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL button will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive NOTE If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION NV 144 Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions The NV 144 is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the Four Wheel Drive 4WD Control Switch which is located on the instrument panel The NV 144 transfer case provides 2 mode positions Four Wheel Drive 4WD and 4 Wheel Drive Lock AWD LO
261. nths 36 42 48 54 60 66 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor X X X X X rect stowage Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months if not replaced at 102 000 miles 170 X 000 km Inspect brake linings X X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if X necessary Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 436 SCHEDULE A mMm quired Miles 72 000 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 Kilometers 120 000 130 000 140 000 150 000 160 000 Months 72 78 84 90 96 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct X X X X X stowage Check transfer case fluid level 4X4 X Inspect brake linings X X Inspect engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X sary Replace spark plugs X Inspect PCV valve replace as necessary X Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re X a SCHEDULE A 437 Miles 102 000 108 000 114 000 120 000 Kilometers 170000 180 000 190 000 200 000 Months 102 108 114 120
262. o clip between the grille and hood opening right of the center before closing hood to prevent damage to grille WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 LIGHTS 811aa567 8196c9da Headlight Switch Headlight Switch Location 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Lights 811aa583 Dimmer Control Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the second upward detent position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are ON you can
263. o maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging If equipped with AUTO you must manually press the Defrost button to clear fog Defrost mode is not a feature of the Automatic Temperature Control 819653ed E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 249 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer 811a5530 818fa09b A rotating switch located on the climate control panel turns the rear wiper On or Off Pressing the rotating switch inward activates the rear window washer Rotating the switch will enable one of five intermittent delay times for the rear wiper The delay times range from 20 to 1 second 250 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned CAUTION off the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will Use care when washing the inside of the rear win resume operation dow to prevent damage to heating elements Use a Rear Window Defrosting soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping ste A push button type switch is located in the climate parallel to the heating elements Also keep all control panel Press the switch and the rear win objects a safe distance from the window to prevent dow defroster and electric remote control heated mirrors damaging the heating elements if equipped will turn On An amber indicator on the push button will light when the defroster is turned On An symbol will be dis
264. o not exceed 40 km h 25 mph Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case Neutral N position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the following informa tion 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 4WD Normal Four Wheel Drive High Range Employs inter axle differential Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds All road surfaces 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock 4WD LOCK Locks the transfer case inter axle differential Forces front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range AWD LOW Low speed 4 wheel drive Locks the transfer case inter axle diffe
265. o the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The second and third row seats have either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
266. o the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation press
267. ock Brake System ABS 275 279 Anti Lock Warning Light ss 190 Anti Theft System llle 17 190 Appearance Care 1 eee ee 393 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Automatic Dimming Mirror 80 83 Automatic Door Locks 0 0 0 0 000 eee 28 Automatic Headlights 00 133 Automatic Transaxle llis 12 258 Automatic Transmission 255 258 389 Adding Fluid ses lerce re Rer aa 389 Fluid and Filter Changes 390 Fluid Level Check 0 0 00 0000 eae 389 Fluid Type eres tae meii RR ERR 390 416 Gear Range soc ecne oe dor ER oh eels ae 258 Special Additives s oeil acs 391 Torque Converter i sees e yep n 262 Axle Fluid edd wb id hod Dex aane s 416 en INDEX 451 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 392 Ball Joints u es ode DOS baw Rea d 377 Battery ua cesse Vua Sepe ux Pan 362 363 375 Cae tO acra stes iacere oe uto a E i bad 354 Emergency Starting llle 354 Gas Caution x kb va REB E EXTA 354 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Saving Feature Protection 132 Belts Drive iu c aa e see bed bea ede oa ed eae 372 Belts Seat i v e Rx bak oe eae SS 39 Body Mechanism Lubrication 378 B Pillar Location 2 205 s00 bia RR IR 293 Brake Assist System 1 doat giria eee eee 280 Brake Control System Electronic 279 Brake Fluid
268. of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule B Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched ule B Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM At Each Stop for Fuel At Each Oil Change Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully e Change the engine oil filter warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the Inspect the brake hoses level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the exhaust system e Inspect the CV
269. ommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation It is not necessary to move the temperature setting for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the tem perature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible NOTE In cold weather the fan will not turn on in AUTO mode until the engine coolant has warmed up sufficiently This is indicated by the WARM UP DELAY message on the display NOTE The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Overhead Console Customer Pro grammable Features The mode will also be shown in the display and will change as required during automatic operation NOTE The system can be put into recirculate mode without affecting ATC operation This will prevent out side air from entering the vehicle Use this mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust 240 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Manual Control ATC You also may choose to customize your comfort by selecting the fan speed and mode manually Turning the fan speed knob or any mode button places the system into manual operation While in manual operation there are six fan speeds available and the choice of any mode The airflow temperature is adjusted automatically to maintain the desired comfo
270. on to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and then say Call NOTE the user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point The UConnect system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if y
271. onds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment In the event that you are still having programming difficulties questions or comments call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com for information or assistance HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof control is located between the sun visors on the overhead console Pressing the open end of the rocker switch once moves the panel to a comfort stop position short of full opening Pressing the switch a second time causes the panel to continue moving rearward up to the full open position To close the panel the close end of the switch must be pressed and held Pressing the vent button from a fully closed position raises the trailing edge of the panel for ventilation When the panel is venting pressing the close end or the rocker switch retur
272. onebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile or pager Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted After confirmation the phonebook entries will be de leted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone butt
273. onnection to the UConnect system When this hap pens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recom mended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Command Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency English Phonebook edia A ice mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last See Enter Number The 32 name language Phonebook See Setup Number on Phone specific phonebook will be Flowchart Flowchart is redialed used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated with entry is dialed Number is Dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Entries Listed one 1st Confirmation at a time New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 8131b294 Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Enter Number Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added 106 UNDERSTANDIN
274. or switch 9 Shift automatic transmission into Park P 10 Start the engine 11 Shift automatic transmission into Drive D NOTE Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral N selection button and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to depress ing the Neutral N button or are no longer met during the 1 second time then all of the position indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral N button is released NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not On the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NOTE Flashing neutral N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met es STARTING AND OPERATING 343 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE ANTON The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar inner surface on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be The following information about your vehicle is dis damaged played on this plate Model Wheelbase Vehicle Identifi e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because cation Number Truck Order Number and code numbers fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage with descriptions of a
275. or the safety of others The ESP system has 2 available operating modes 4WD AWD LOCK or 2WD Models ON This is the normal operating mode for ESP in WD LOCK and in 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW or neutral back to 4WD LOCK the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF Control Switch When in Partial Off mode the engine management portion of ESP has been desensitized the thresh steessre Olds for ESP activation are raised and Partial off the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel es STARTING AND OPERATING 285 conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor mally allow is required to gain traction TSC Trailer Sway Control is not available when the system is in the Partial Off mode To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP Control OFF Control Switch This will restore the normal ON mode of operation ESP always operates under braking even with the switch in the OFF position WARNING In the Partial Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unava
276. orm the change in the front end structure The airbags as described earlier in this manual could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision resulting in serious injury or death ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 MOTORHOME ETC Recreational Towing 2WD Models You or others could be injured if you leave the Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable vp tinatended bis n me puc cane e me Towing the vehicle with the transmission in Neutral can Nenial UN position without firat fully engaging He cause severe transmission damage Removal of the drive parking rales The traristencase Neutea LUN position shaft for towing is not recommended since this allows disengages Both the tro DE anu tear drive shati from transmissioi fluid taceat out the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking Recreational Towing 4WD Models brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle CAUTION Vehicles equipped with an NV 144 Transfer Case CAUTION which has no neutral position may NOT be used for recreational towing Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE The NV 244 Generation II transfer case must be shifted into Neutral N for recreational towing The Neutral N selection button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Swi
277. ose the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 115 V Inverter Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF Battery Fed Configuration CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge suffi ciently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the bat 115V Inverter Plug tery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accesso ries still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reconfiguring Power Outlets To reconfigure the outlets be sure the ignition is OFF before removing the fuse The reconfigurable fuse loca tion is a special design that allows the fuse to be installed in two different ways If the fuse is located in the Upper or Top Position the outlets will work at all times If the fuse is located in the Lower or Bottom Position the power outlets will only wo
278. osition roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle Power Window Switch The control on the left front door has up down switches that give you finger tip control of all four power win dows There is a single opening and closing switch on the passenger doors for passenger window control The 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se windows will operate only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and for ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or the driver s door is opened This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer NOTE The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for ten minutes after the ignition it turned OFF WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Auto Down The driver s and front passenger window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection Driver s and Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch to the second detent
279. ou would like to answer the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between C
280. our fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat build up which reduces bulb To replace the left foglamp bulb life 1 3 Wheel liner screws 2 1 Air dam screw 1 Remove the three wheel liner screws 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel 4 7L 87 Octane 27 Gal 102L 5 7L 89 Octane 27 Gal 102L Engine Oil with filter 4 7L SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Ot 5 7L 5 7L SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Qt 6 6L Cooling System includes 2 1 Qts 2L for coolant bottle CX e M o c 142 04 m 7L Engin r Antifreez lan AT enr 100000 Mile Formala Ion mm NOTE All fluid capacities are approximate ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent s SAE 5W 20 API Certified meeting material standard MS 6395 or equiva ent Use SAE 5W 20 API Certified meeting material standard MS 6395 or equiva lent Mopar Engine Oil Filter P N 5281090 or equivalent Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com artment 87 Octane R M 2 Method 89 Octane R M 2 Method 4 7L Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 4 7L Fuel Selectio
281. ous if done improperly See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled on fuel injected engines and will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The 4 7L engine block heater cord is located at the front of the engine compartment near the radiator cap The 5 7L engine block heater cord is located on the left side of the engine compartment and rearward of the power distri bution center WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission The electronic PRNDL on the instrum
282. ow in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys and are otherwise unavailable In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corpo ration such investigations may be requested by custom ers insurance carriers government officials and profes sional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organiza tions In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash Data Parameters that May Be Recorded databases
283. p the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna 230 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches BACK VIEW OF STEERING WHEEL 818fa12a ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 231 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bo
284. pect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radia tor is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS
285. peed control system to shut off and will erase the memory Push the ON OFF button to the ON position In the instrument cluster the word CRUISE illuminates when the system is on To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press and release the SET button Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal normal braking or pressing the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control with out erasing the memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the memory WARNING Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system to cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push and release the RESUME button Resume can be used at any speed above refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is on speed can be increased by pressing and holding the ACCEL button When the button is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed increase refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine Each time the button is
286. peedometer c Rp e eR RR 189 Tachometer 2222219 bem RR ER 190 Gear Ranges a cesses bana e Dasa Ho e Ro dO 258 General Information 000005 17 311 Glass Cleaning i Sack smd ein esa gas ORC ase 397 Grease awe ER Eger Cees eee Ae Se dps 392 Gross Axle Weight Rating 322 326 Gross Cargo Weight isis e er her en 321 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 325 GVWR i e eedem exse Cd dox 322 324 Hands Free Phone UConnect 83 Hazard Warning Flasher 346 Headlights estie ERE ERES tenths 407 Cleaning ances ich pese d diegene Facete 396 Delay 4k ure Rte x e EON do oe 133 HighBeam xci ta ees aea beg us 137 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 137 Lights On Reminder 0000 135 PASSING sce nce FS RNAS mer v acd oes der eee 137 Replacing nau cioe eR Ch eae de PERE 407 Heated Mirrors sore mure ees eorr es mee 83 Heated Seats i esed i Poen PR ad 112 Heater i ges acc c Rte dos ia Red eie e dcs 233 Heater Engine Block 000005 257 High Beam Indicator 000006 188 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 137 en INDEX 457 Hitches Trailer Towing HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 160 Hood Release 0 0 ee eee eee 129 HOSES os aa eae UU RR EUR Ge ae ERR 386 ISMWHON xzssceesu pss ewm ng eee de ah 12 13 Key ca cee ce ee e Pee ek Cee RUE a 12 LOCK java eoe Gn dae PRU REP IS ES 13 Ignition Key R
287. played when the defroster is turned on with an ATC control Push again to turn Off prior to time out The defroster will automatically turn Off after fifteen minutes For ten more minutes of operation push the button again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS la Starting Procedures adserit retten 255 Automatic Transmission 255 Normal Starting soseer iadaa pegea 255 Bi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 257 Bl Automatic Transmission 000 258 Automatic Transmission aa 258 Bl Four Wheel Drive Operation 263 NV 144 Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions 263 Shifting Procedure NV 144 Transfer Case 266 NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions Shifting Procedure NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case ertesi sm ek gees 271 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 272 W Parking Brake oeoeeduescke eee e 273 la Brake System uo 39e 34 ERE ER ES 275 Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS 275 ll Power Steering 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME li Electronic Brake Control System 279 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 279 BAS Brake Assist System 280 TCS Trac
288. ply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal R Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Shift to Neutral when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle except as specified under Towing A Disabled Vehicle coasting or otherwise driv ing the vehicle while in N Neutral can cause severe transmission damage D Drive For most city and highway driving 2 Second For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain roads where more precise speed control is desirable Use it also when climbing long grades and for engine brak ing when descending moderately steep grades To pre vent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 miles per hour 72 km h in this range es STARTING AND OPERATING 261 1 First For driving up very ste
289. possible en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Maintaining Your Airbag System Enhanced Accident Response System If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical WARNING system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically In addition Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not p TRINH there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring moving the interior lights will light until the ignition including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel switch is turned off hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket 3 i side steps or running boards Airbag Light Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system You will want to have the airbags ready to The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for FN any advanced airbag system service If your seat including your trim the airbag system is designed to be mainte cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal nance fr if anv of followin or loosening tightening of seat attachmen
290. r 90 seconds when the Remote Keyless Entry UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE This feature can be activated by your authorized dealer Daytime Running Lights Canada Only The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started This provides a constant Lights ON condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at reduced intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn off If the headlights are activated the Daytime Running Lights feature will transition to the normal headlight operating mode ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Lights on Reminder If the headlights parking lights or courtesy lights are left On after the ignition is turned Off a continuous fast chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped 811aa59c Fog Light Switch The fog lights are turned ON by placing the headlight rotary control in the parking light headlight or Auto position and pressing the fog light button The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are ON or when the vehicle headlights are ON low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pressed in when the head light switch is rotated to the OFF position or the high beam is selected Multifunction Control Lever The multifunction control lever is loc
291. r case serviced immediately in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type CAUTION Damage may result from operation of the vehicle with low transfer case fluid The transfer case fluid should be drained and refilled at Special Additives the intervals specified The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives to the transmission Exception to Lubricant Selection this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be fluid type avoided since they may adversely affect seals 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Axles Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type The manufacturer does not recommend regularly sched uled oil changes for axles in vehicles whose operation is classified as normal truck service NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Rear Axle Rear Axle fluid levels should be 1 4 6 4 mm
292. r inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale lamp General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States cesses KR55S120123 Ca ada uer Re o 2671 S120123 STARTING AND OPERATING 311 FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations 87 and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un 800diab leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The routine use of pre mium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium fuel will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD The 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The routine use of premium gasoline is not
293. r recreational towing only See Recreational Tow ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral N Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster If there are no indicator lights on or flashing the transfer case position is Four Wheel Drive AWD and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection AWD amp 4WD LOCK The SVC 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the Service 4WD light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The NV 244 Generation II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case en STARTING AND OPERATING 269 When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and d
294. rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield Mopar All Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful ff to paint or trim 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust System WARNING The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon system monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low the preceding safety tips Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition ins
295. rating the jack or changing the wheel e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site the jacking position For example if the right front wheel is being changed block the left rear wheel N BLOCKA e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Instructions 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 3 When changing a front wheel place the jack under the frame rail behind the wheel Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of the frame prior to inboard transition Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench the tube exten sion may be used but is not required Front Jacking Location When changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as posssible with the drive tubes extending to the rear Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench 81316de4 Rear Left Jacking Location 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make Rear Right Jacking Location Before raising the wheel off the ground
296. re tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811ad0d6 Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
297. recommended The use of premium RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 89 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of regular gasoline be fore considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle We recommend the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygena
298. red Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control This additional feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle The seat cushion will move rear ward approximately 2 5 inches 60 mm when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward approximately 2 5 inches 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position Each stored memory setting will have an asso ciated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position The Easy Exit and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 the seat is positioned rearward enough and no benefit TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD from moving the seat any farther rearward To open the hood two latches must be released First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be en abled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to EASY EXIT SEAT under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual Hood Release Lever 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Then push the safety latch lever to the left It is located NOTE Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated int
299. ren tial Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle See Recreational Towing for more infor mation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 Shifting Procedure NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case 8197509c NOTE The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between 4WD 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation a position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning NOTE Delayed shifting out of the 4WD LOCK position may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading NOTE When shifting into or out of WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped USE EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine RUNNING slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 272 STARTIN
300. ress the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With REC Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the radio off press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta neously until the 12 digits of the ESN SID appear on the screen 228 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Selecting Satellite Mode in REF RAQ and RAK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting Satellite Mode RAO and RAK Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN
301. rface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Control 81125530 The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather The following describes its operation INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 233 Air Conditioning Operation To turn the air conditio
302. rgency Test Emergency Test Foreign Language Foreign Language Information Information 212 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalgia Oldies Oldies Personality Personality Public Public Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Religious_Music Religious_Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft_Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_ amp _B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top_40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SET DIR Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET DIR button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET DIR button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 213 You may add a second station to each push button b
303. riveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic sys
304. riving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se SNOWPLOW CAUTION Dodge Durango or Chrysler Aspen Models Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can NOTE Do not use Dodge Durango or Chrysler Aspen cause damage to the vehicle Models for snowplow applications WARNING WARNING Snowplows winches and other aftermarket equip Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could ad ment should not be added to the front end or your versely affect performance of the airbag system in an vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by accident Do not expect that the airbag will perf
305. rk when the ignition is ON NOTE The fuse block is located in the left side kick panel behind a removable cover near the park brake pedal A fuse puller is attached to the inside surface of the fuse panel cover to aid in removing fuses if necessary TOP FUSE BLOCK 20A RECON FIGURABLE FUSE LOCATION YELLOW AIRBAG BATTERY TOP FUSES LOCATION IGN BOTTOM POSITION 817e7f62 FLOOR CONSOLE Front Floor Console Features The Floor Console between the driver s and front pas senger s seat has the following features e Miscellaneous storage compartments e Flexible cup holder inserts es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 e Portable phone storage bin e Portable phone cord routing between lid and base on forward edge e 12 Volt reconfigurable power outlet inside storage compartment e Side open armrest lid e Tissue holder amp pen holder e Coin slots e Removable CD bin The coin slots are located under the instrument panel center stack Cup Holders Your vehicle has 8 cupholders four are located in the center console two are located in the second row armrest or rear floor console if equipped and two are located in the left hand quarter panel for third row occupants The cupholders and storage bin located in the front of the center console can be accessed by pressing on the access doors NOTE In colder temperatures you may experience a slight delay on console doo
306. rker llli 168 bog LAM picks ya ie REY bs eas 9006LL License Plate Light 168 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Side Marker 3057 BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights Parking Turn Signal 1 Remove the two bolts attaching the headlight to the upper fender reinforcement hood must be opened to access bolts 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Remove one nut that attaches the headlight to the inner fender panel Access to the nut is possible by opening the fender panel access door which is located in the wheel liner 8192c460 3 Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the headlight from the fender panel 4 While firmly holding the headlight in your hands disconnect all connectors by following the procedure described in step number 5 below 5 Remove the bulb connector from the headlight making sure to pull and release the red tab on all connectors Loosen the connector by pressing down on the black and or green release which is located below or above the red tab The green release is located above the red tab on the H13 the black release is located above the 3457AK red tab 6 Twist and remove socket from lamp 7 Remove bulb from socket and replace NOTE These are Halogen bulbs Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat build up which reduces bulb life ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Tail Lights Turn Signal
307. rosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics chil dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Small Children e This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn babies at the right front passenger seat position If a car bed must be used to transport a newborn baby the car bed must be installed in the second seating row only Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children w
308. rs carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is espe cially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in personal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED To open the side cover pull on the cover latch and attach The cargo management system consists of a removable the cord to the upper cargo net hook cargo liner and removable cargo organizer To open the main cover pull up on the latch and attach 1 Side Cover Latch the cord to the rear seat head restraint post 2 Main Cover Latch 3 Cargo Divider Handles To open the Cargo divider lift up on the cargo divider handles raising the doors to the full open position Raise the side panels until they engage into the doors 1 Cargo Divider Door 2 Cargo Divider Side Panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 To remove the cargo management system from the ve hicle pull the right hand side of the organizer towards you so that the right pin slides out of the slot in the vehicle Push the
309. rs opening the console door speed will come back to normal after 1 2 cycles Cup Holder Doors 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Center Console The front storage bin in the center console is equipped with a removable bin mat This mat can be removed by pulling on the tab located on the front edge of the bin mat Removing this mat will allow you to retrieve any lost item that are between the bin doors Bin Mat Tab Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage The console is equipped with a power outlet portable phone storage bin and phone cord routing The phone storage bin can be used when easy access to the phone is needed Also the power outlet inside the console com partment can be used to power up the phone while it is ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 being stored in the bin To use plug in the portable power recharge cord and place the cord along the opening under the forward portion of the storage bin Close the console armrest lid and plug the power cord into the phone while resting the phone in the bin The power outlet may be used for any portable item with a standard 12 volt power outlet adaptor requiring up to 20 Amps of current Rear Floor Console Features If Equipped The Rear Floor Console located between the second row bucket seat has the following features e Miscellaneous storage compartments e Cup holders e Portable phone cord routing on either side between
310. rt level You can adjust the temperature by pressing the or TEMP rocker switches FAN Control Use this knob to regulate the amount of air delivered through the system in any mode you select Rotation of the knob to increase clockwise or decrease counter clockwise fan speed Air Conditioning Operation Press this button to enable the air conditioning system Compressor operation is automatic when you press the AUTO button and no snowflake is shown A snowflake indicates that the A C system is enabled The snowflake will not be displayed in AUTO mode even though the A C system is enabled The compressor may operate at any temperature above 32 F 0 C NOTE The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for several seconds Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the com pressor cycles This is a normal occurrence since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and improve fuel economy Recirculate Button Press this button to recirculate the air inside the CES vehicle Outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle Use this mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke dust or when rapid cooling of the interior is required Manual control of Recirculation is possible only in Panel Floor and Bi Level modes It will not operate in Mix or Defrost modes The recirculation symbol will flash three times indicating recirculation is not available in th
311. s And Backup Lights 2 Rotate the light to the outboard side of the vehicle and Replacement remove 1 Remove the two push pins from the tail light housing E E 192b924 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Unlock and remove electrical connector 8192b928 4 Twist bulb sockets counterclockwise to remove from housing 8192b92c 5 Remove the bulbs from the bulb sockets by pulling the bulb straight out ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 License Lights 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise s 1 Push tab towards the lamp and remove lamp assem bly 3 Pull bulb from socket 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Center High Mounted Stoplight 1 Remove two screws securing stoplight housing assem bly to the liftgate 811a88f0 3 Pull bulb straight from socket to remove 2 Turn socket 1 4 counterclockwise and free from hous ing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Fog Lights 2 Remove the remove the far left air dam screw at the bottom of the fascia 3 Peel back the liner and access the foglamp 4 Rotate the socket and connector 1 4 turn counter clockwise and pull straight reward to disengage from the lamp 5 Remove the bulb from the socket and replace The right foglamp can be accessed from below the vehicle Follow the previous steps 4 and 5 of the left foglamp to replace the bulb NOTE These are Halogen bulbs Take care not to touch 7 the bulb with y
312. s Entry transmitter to memory NOTE Achime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Memory Position Recall NOTE e The driver s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall memory positions e The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory posi tions e Not all motors may be moved at one time Please refer to the 8 way power seat description To recall the memory settings for driver one press memory button number 1 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press memory button number 2 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 or pressing any one of the power seat buttons or pressing the adjustable pedals button or pressing either the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry trans mitter when not in the ignition switch When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected NOTE Achime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason To Disable A Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove t
313. s and give an even blend of both modes Recirculation Mode Panel or Bi Level 2e Select either the Panel or Bi Level mode positions when the outside air contains smoke odors high humidity or if rapid cooling of the interior is desired This feature allows for recir culation of interior air only when ei ther of these positions are selected Air flows through the panel outlets or panel and floor outlets in these modes c 27 811b550b Panel Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 235 Bi Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and those located on the floor NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Heat Floor Outside air flows primarily through the floor out lets located under the instrument panel A small amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Qt e Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlet 236 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Defrost Qv Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlet located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets NOTE
314. s d RE 311 Reformulated Gasoline 312 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 312 MMT In Gasoline 0005 313 Materials Added To Fuel 314 Fuel System Cautions 0 314 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 315 BM Adding Fudd i62 RR 316 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 316 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 317 Mi Flexible Fuel sese 318 E 85 General Information 318 Ethanol Fuel E 85 Fuel Requirements Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 320 Staring Scien reca s v ger da dale a deas 320 Cruising Range 0 0000000 320 Replacement Parts 00 0 320 Maintenances 22 14 aot oe HERE Yes 321 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Vehicle Loading ssec cay bir ER Ix en 321 Towing Requirements i sce ae e Ren 331 Certification Label 0 00 321 TOWING lips 4a nere R3 eagles aes 336 Cup Weight couiueun eere yx eens 02 Monowplw coes us e xe Reads 338 Loading e ded oes wea edes 323 Dodge Durango Or Chrysler Aspen Models 338 B Trailer Towing amp e 3u ub ex awe Re 325 W Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 339 Common Towing Definitions 325 Recreational Towing 2WD Mod
315. s light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for approximately 3 seconds If this light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required See your authorized dealer immedi ately With the ABS malfunctioning the BAS and ESP are also switched off Both malfunction indicator lights illu minate with the engine running If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts the malfunction indicator light illuminates and the ABS is switched off When the voltage is above this value again the malfunction indi cator light should go out and the ABS is operational If the malfunction indicator light stays illuminated have the system checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 13 Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light QE This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has become too low For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible Immediate service should be obtained 14 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 191 15 Gear Selector The electronic gear selector display is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the position of the automatic transmission shift lever and t
316. s through the following modes Rear Control from Front This allows the driver or passenger to control the rear blower speeds rotating the POWER FAN knob and the rear temperature using the pass rear TEMP rocker switch While in this mode pressing the POWER FAN knob will turn the rear system off Pressing the POWER FAN knob will turn the rear system back on NOTE The display will show a REAR fan speed graph and a REAR digital temp setting ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 243 CONTROL IN REAR This allows the passengers in the second row seats to control the blower speed and temperature by means of the rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as described under the Rear Zone Climate Control NOTE The front display will show CONTROL IN REAR REAR OFF This turns the rear system off The control will return to the front system display after approximately 5 seconds if no buttons are pushed while in one of the rear system displays You may also return to the front system display sooner by pushing any button except the POWER FAN knob the rear button the driver passenger temp rocker buttons NOTE The display will show REAR OFF REAR AUTO This mode places the rear system in automatic tempera ture control Rear temperature can be set as desired 72 recommended for average person and will be displayed digitally on the front control when in rear mode Rear Window Defrosting and Re
317. sed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers knee bolsters front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and left and right side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature refer to the Child Restraint section in this manual can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short
318. should be applied whenever the Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged driver is not in the vehicle before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly increased over that required with the power system operating If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal capability the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Lamp and the ABS Lamp during brake use Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All v
319. st be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc or if the front airbags have deployed If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see you authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer If there is a problem with the airbag light the seatbelt light will flash Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Lights Fluid Leaks Check the operation of all exterior lights Check turn Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument water oil or other fluid leaks Also if fuel fumes are panel detected the cause should be located and corrected Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
320. stead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Ph
321. stenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning ON OFF the ignition will cancel the MUTE feature NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will display for 5 seconds 202 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button
322. ster Rear Window s 250 Defroster Windshield 73 235 236 241 242 Delay Intermittent Wipers 138 Diagnostic System Onboard 364 Dimmer Switch Headlight 188 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 389 OIL Engine bso Rv eskia sp asiki 368 PowersSteernp aio noe ha ede ads Ripe ea RR 377 Disarming Theft System 20 18 Disc Brakes 4 2 2 2 387 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 384 Door Locks 240 lemen oad bette neal EE TES 27 Door Opener Garage ees 160 Drive Belts areare me ie er ee ae eels da A 372 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 378 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 226 E 85 Fuel Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 454 INDEX ME Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 288 Jacking cse xe Koa m Ee dep RES eek aue 349 Tow Hooks cux ueque Ex xa RE XY 356 TOWNE aue Sg ee eoque gets ae pae 357 Emission Control System Maintenance 418 Emission Related Components 386 Engine Air Cleaner llle 373 Block Heater 2222s kx Rb 257 Break In Recommendations 71 Compartment 000000000 362 363 Coolant Antifreeze
323. supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are re quired during the day Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery Load Shed ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for eight minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled off the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8 minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for 8 minutes while the ignition is off the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON NOTE While the engine is running the system will deactivate the Fog Lights and Heated seats if a low battery system voltage is detected Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is cycled off while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off The headlights will remain on for 90 seconds Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch ON then OF
324. surfaces the ABS will respond even with light brake pedal pressure because of the increased likelihood of locking wheels The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be done by qualified professionals WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the Anti lock Brake system you will experience e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop This is ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor the result of the system reverting to the base brake can it increase braking or steering efficiency be system yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Fugecement of he ANLO Brake system may pe accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a The ABS cannot prevent accidents including clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indi those resulting from excessive speed in turns cate that the system is functioni
325. t System For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two procedures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for 5 seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session using the above procedure and follow the prompts 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Recognition VR Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weat
326. t Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or START positions UNIT IN US METRIC Press the RESET button to toggle between US and METRIC e AVG MPG Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Example If your Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC displays 18 AVG MPG and the RESET button is pressed the previous averaging his tory will be erased and the display will return to the 18 AVG MPG not to 0 AVG MPC The display may take several miles for the value to change dependent upon driving habits e MI TO EMPTY Distance To Empty Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level MI TO EMPTY cannot be reset through the RESET button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until
327. t Maintenance 004 397 Seat Belt Reminder 0 00 0 48 Seat Belts i e cce PP RE Ee 38 39 73 And Pregnant Women s sesi erarema aas 50 Child Restial t 222m ricrea ta eris 62 63 en INDEX 463 Extender 4 cru hk ce eee ber e OE ee OE NOR 50 Front Seat 5 2 22 9 s o o as 39 Pretensioners 0 0 0 0 eee es 48 Reminder cereus Sade he 3X ERU 188 Seals sss ex Reka A OS EN RA do Y Ue SO aG 108 Adjustment llle ees 108 Cleaning cc eeu a dl eri tdt tem es 395 Fold and Tumble Rear 115 117 Heated 45i usare aa ceder Ye 112 Lumbar Support sisus s esiis 00 00 e cae 110 MEMO os obige ma d ikea ERU Pee 125 Rear Folding seess rasane me Rex 115 117 Reclining 4 44 0 254 3 ed o Xe Ray HR imtis 109 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 190 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 382 415 Selecion of Qil au susc hein ace cose Ae ees 370 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Service and Maintenance 367 418 Service Assistance llle 442 Service Contract 0 llle 444 Service Manuals 0 0 eee 446 Setting the Clock 197 198 202 210 222 Settings Personal ce de eve eee ae Ea 155 Shifting Automatic Transmission 258 Transfer Case sri 1 es 263 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 2 2 ee ee 340 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 4i4ekicrkm EE sb pee e
328. t bolts take the vehicle to ita dod dis the follo ee pens have your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories an authorized dealer service the system promptly may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer e The airbag light does not come on or flickers during You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount sags eo f or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself turned on Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system e The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the airbag control mod ule may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an airbag deployment your vehicle is designed to record up to 2 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see list bel
329. tapped speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by three increments Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed decrease refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine Each time the button is tapped speed will decrease For example tapping the button 3 times will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the table below refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine To decrease speed while the speed control is on press and hold the DECEL button Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Functions 4 7L 5 7L Engage Speed 35 mph 56 km h 25 mph 40 km h Minimun RESUME Speed 30 mph 50 km h 20 mph 32 km h ACCEL Increase 2 mph 3km h 1 mph 2 km h DECEL Decrease 1 mph 2 km h 1 mph 2 km h Dropout Speed 30 mph 50 km h 20 mph 32 km h To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE When driving uphill at elevations above 2 000 feet 610 meters or when the vehicle is heavily loaded especially when towing the vehicle may slow below the SET speed If the vehicle speed drops below refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine the speed control will automatically disengage If this hap pens
330. tch Shifts into and out of transfer case Neutral N can take place with the selector switch in any mode position Shifting into Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in Neutral N before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut engine OFF 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine 4 Depress brake pedal 5 Shift automatic transmission to Neutral N 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case Neutral N button for 4 seconds 7 After shift is completed and the Neutral N light comes on release Neutral N button 8 Start engine 9 Shift automatic transmission into Reverse R 10 Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement es STARTING AND OPERATING 341 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive D 12 Turn ignition key to the unlocked OFF position 13 Shift automatic transmission into Park P 14 Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar NOTE Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral N selection button and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elaspes and the shift has been completed If any of these requ
331. te Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 1076 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components NOTE 4 7L Engine If Equipped is now rated for E85 Ethanol use Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 For more information refer to Flexible Fuel in this section Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Metha nol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasolines blended with MMT provide no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance We recom mend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gaso line retailer wh
332. te to severe frontal collisions and occupant size The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has window bags do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section later in this owner s manual 54 THINGS TO KNOW
333. te with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or rel
334. tem is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system is determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 sec onds and then remain on until the first engine crank or the key is turned off This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the first engine crank or the key is turned off This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or
335. tgate is not fully open press the remote keyless entry transmitter or overhead console button to fully open the liftgate and then press again to close If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h e The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close However vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are clo
336. th the used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may restraint in the front seat may be struck by a not work when you need it deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere ot total lt 0 the infant e The second row outside seating positions and all third row seats have cinching latch plates The second row center position has an automatic locking retractor These are designed to keep the lap portion tight ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructio
337. th visible and audible warnings indicating the range of the object es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window omm The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle Rear Park Assist LED s 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED 59 in 150 cm Yellow None 2nd LED 47 in 120 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 31 5 in 80 cm Yellow None 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 25 5 in 65 cm Yellow None 6th LED 20 in 50 cm 20 in 50 cm Yellow None 7th LED 16 in 40 cm 16 in 40 cm Red at 12 in 30 cm Intermittent 8th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red at 8 in 20 cm Continuous NOTE The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
338. the automatic locking mode simply allow the seat belt to retract fully into the retractor to return the seat belt to the normal emergency locking mode 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Rear 60 40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point Belt If Equipped The center three point seat belt for the third row rear seat may be disconnected to allow the 60 seat back to easily fold down The keyed buckle latch plate small latch plate at the end of the belt can be detached from the keyed seat belt buckle buckle without a red release button located on the left inboard side of the third row bench seat Insert the ignition key into the center white slot on the keyed buckle The small latchplate can be removed when the key is pressed into the buckle Allow the retractor to take up the surplus webbing and insert the latch plates into the slots in the headliner for storage while the 60 seat back is folded down WARNING e If the small keyed buckle latch plate and keyed buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide the proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When reattaching the small keyed buckle latch plate and keyed buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceeding procedure to detach the small latch plate from the keyed buckle untwist the webbing and reattach the sma
339. the brake If the parking brake is applied the light will flash when the gear position is out of park for automatic transmis sions If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary Operating the vehicle in this condition is danger ous 22 ESP BAS Warning Lamp The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined ESP with BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible 194 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively operating 23 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system tr which monitors the emissions and engine control system If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check un
340. the seat heating level will automatically change to the next lower level or 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M off Both of the indicators on identifies High heat level The lower indicator on only identifies Low heat level Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care NOTE The high heat setting will operate for approxi mately 30 minutes After 30 minutes the system will automatically transition to the low heat setting The low heat setting will operate for 30 minutes then the system will turn off when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long If the low heat setting is initially selected the system will periods of time operate for 30 minutes and then turn off Do not place anything on the seat that insulates If the indicator lamp on the heated seat switch does not against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may light an indicator blinks when the switch is depressed or cause the seat heater to overheat if the heated seats do not operate the system should be serviced by a qualified technician es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Second Row Bucket Seats Fold and Tumble 3 Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the Second row bucket seats have seatback recliners o
341. the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operations Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the voice on beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of th
342. thin the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD 220 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode MSG or INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File
343. til the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 10 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condi tion investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 195 24 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and gt inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
344. til the wheel is drawn clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If into place against the underside of the vehicle Continue acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the con to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click taminated area immediately with large quantities 2 times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire of water several times to be sure it is firmly in place A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 Check the Battery Test Indicator if equipped If a light or bright colored dot is visible in the indicator if equipped DO NOT jump start the battery If the indicator if equipped is dark or shows a green dot proceed as follows 1 Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles 3 Turn OFF heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
345. tinue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink The EVIC will display CHANNEL X TRAINING and then CHAN NEL X TRAINED Proceed with Programming step four to complete es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions con tact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed note below follow the step noted e Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and the EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS do not release the buttons until CHANNELS CLEARED is displayed on the EVIC after approxi mately 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds HomeLink is now in the
346. tion Control System 281 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 282 ESP Electronic Stability Program 283 Multi Displacement System MDS 5 7L Engine Only cots cad ue Pee eas bir days 287 Wi Rocking The Vehicle 00005 288 H Tire Safety Information scere Rn 288 Tire Markings sm b Keo oes oe 288 Tire Identification Number TIN 292 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 293 Bl Tires General Information 297 Tire Pressure snena csv Rb ex ENS 297 Tire Inflation Pressures 298 RadiaEPly eS ide eR4 ee p ieas 300 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 301 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 302 Tue Spinning ecseeesedu4 ex e nce ees 302 Tread Wear Indicators sess 303 Lite Of Tire sock ese RR Y 304 Replacement Tires llle 304 Alignment And Balance 305 ll Supplemental Tire Pressure Information If Equipped ees Lege RR EEG 306 es STARTING AND OPERATING 253 H Siow Tires 0 2 eee 306 Mi Tire Rotation Recommendations 306 H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS It Equipped iade ee puse P rax e ds 307 Base System If Equipped 308 General Information 0 311 B Fuel Requirements cise as cae sea
347. tion ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 SEEK Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 215 LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READ
348. tions Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing and follow the audible prompts When prompted after the voice on beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Call Dial by Saying a Number Press th
349. to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both
350. to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer STARTING AND OPERATING 331 e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Fo
351. to the map 5 Press and release the compass button to exit GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED The HomeLink Wireless Control System replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper ate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates or home lighting It triggers these devices at the push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehicle s battery and charging system no batteries are needed 8192e7d3 For additional information on HomeLink call 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING A moving garage door can cause injury to people and pets in the path of the door People or pets could be seriously or fatally injured Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener mod els manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com for safety information or assistance WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the
352. torms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop PARKING BRAKE The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in PARK position When parking on a hill you should apply the Parking Brake before placing the gear shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of PARK 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE The instrument cluster brake warning light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav the vehicle ing your vehicle or vehicle may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in Park Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake
353. train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming step 2 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button DO NOT release the button 2 The EVIC will display CHANNEL X TRANSMIT for 20 seconds and then change to CHANNEL X TRAIN ING Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Programming step 2 For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Security Garage Door Opener Operation with Security Alarm if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the Security Alarm feature the operation of the HomeLink feature will be purposely inhibited if the Security Alarm is Armed This prevents HomeLink operation due to un authorized vehicle entry HomeLink operation will be re stored when the Security Alarm has been Disarmed pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry key fob If you sell your vehicle be sure to erase the HomeLink buttons by following the Erasing HomeLink Buttons instructions in this section To erase all previously trained frequencies press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and the EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS do not release the buttons until CHANNELS CLEARED is displayed on the EVIC after approximately 20 sec
354. tronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 3 of this manual SENTRY KEY IF EQUIPPED The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is consid ered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle runnin
355. ts colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode position on the control Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 247 Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions This will also prevent snow ingestion into the ducts 248 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Operating Tips Chart HOT WEATHER Start the vehicle open the windows and turn the blower control to the high position use AUTO AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS mode if equipped Set Mode control at 4 or 44 Set Temperature control to full cold VERY HOT and press the 4 button on After the hot air has been expelled close t
356. ttom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push buttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios 232 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the compact discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the su
357. ture effects The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM warning lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPM warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 kph to receive this information Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Wheel Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp y The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every
358. ure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles of operation This is a normal part of the break in and is not an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust System WARNING Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an ex tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless To avoid inhaling these gases the follow ing precautions should be observed e Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any
359. ure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h Refer to the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced STARTING AND OPERATING 303 TREAD WEAR INDICATOR i Al ES These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not li
360. ures 462 INDEX a Rear Wiper Washer esee 249 Rearview Mirrors 0 000 ee eee eee 79 Reclining Front Seats ensai mtaa ss 109 Recorder Event Data 00000008 60 Recreational Towing 0000000000 339 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 340 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 341 Reformulated Gasoline l l 312 Refrigerant 599 s eb deron Rebelde 377 Release Hood 0 0 00 cee eee eee 129 Reminder Seat Belt 00 00 00 ee 48 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 230 Remote Starting System llle 25 Replacement Parts eee 366 Replacement Tires i scbuss se oh acre Rr de ss 304 Reporting Safety Defects isses 445 Restraints Child 0 0 0 0 0c eee 62 67 Restraints Occupant Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 288 Roll Over Warning sse e Res 4 Roof Type Carrier esse Rees 176 Rotation lues 2 2 22 nica Sede asa woe aes 306 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 73 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 73 Safety Defects Reporting 4 445 Safety Exhaust Gas 0 0 0 0 ss 38 Safety Information Tire 04 288 oalety LIPS douces edd uoo aiea dna dud 72 Satellite Radio llle 222 226 Satellite Radio Antenna 0 229 Schedule Maintenance sess 418 Seat Bel
361. ver 135 Navigation Radio 1 6 6 2 0 0 00 e eee 222 Navigation System 0 000 e eee 222 New Vehicle Break In Period 71 Occupant Classification System OCS 55 Occupant Restraints 000000 38 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 311 CIL Engine 2432 25 raner ua tei Gee pua xs 368 415 Capacity cess s RR e WR eat ARS s 414 Change Interval sss knee amen 369 Dipstick ase 22i ERR E nae YS 368 Disposal aee SOROR RO Ee RRRA E 371 Filter ee eneak ea ege cicer RR 371 415 Filter Disposal 6i sse sec ak e 371 Identification Logo Materials Added to 0000 371 Recommendation 370 414 oyntheli iaces xe Eme e epos weed 371 VISCOSILY sig scs ss Ox a aE ee Ra 370 414 Onboard Diagnostic System 364 365 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 160 Outside Rearview Mirrors 004 81 Overdrive doa ak a eae ae Oka Sate ied 191 261 Overdrive OFF Switch 0 00 261 Overhead Console Ls 150 151 Overheating Engine 0 0 0 0 0 p cee 189 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 446 Pamiec Alarni iu eoe TRI gg ete eee eas 22 Parking Brake s 4294 49 ER E ae ays 273 Parking Onm Euli 25 wait Actes Spe ata doh and deities 273 Passing Light 232a aint be oe p Een 137 Pedals Adjustable 0 00040 141 Personal Settings oee cosac cree e b Res 155 en INDE
362. verfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Front Suspension Ball Joints The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever the vehicle is serviced for other reasons Damaged seals should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination of the grease 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints All four wheel drive models are equipped with four constant velocity joints Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required However the joint boot should be inspected for external leakage or damage periodically If external leakage or damage is evident the joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately Continued op eration could result in failure of the joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease This would require complete replacement of the joint assembly Refer to the Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors iftgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricati
363. with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTER 818fa815 This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size This vehicle is also equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The window bags are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG
364. y repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display 214 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS M CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the igni
365. y in cold starting and may affect drivability VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door 8120c1d2 This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and shows the Month Day and 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems Total load must be limited so that GVWR is not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels
366. ys buckle up NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual 6 INTRODUCTION m mes sj m Xi ESP om ap 7 ej BAS 3 S m ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUT
367. ystem Activation NOTE Your vehicle s radio must be on and in satellite mode when the activation process takes place To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 227 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will display Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits display The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF p

Owners Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents